JP6780991B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, there is a game machine in which a sound pattern and a lamp pattern are determined based on an effect number (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this game machine, the lamp pattern has a hierarchy, and the light emission effect is performed by the lamp pattern of the hierarchy having a high priority.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-61148

However, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, since there is only one ramp pattern in the hierarchy regardless of the gaming state, the interest of the player may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a lamp effect in a priority order according to a gaming state.

(1) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), which is one aspect of the present invention, is an effect to be executed (for example, a slot machine, etc.). , BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, big prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize effect, error effect, etc.) Light emitting means that can emit light with multiple types of light emission patterns (for example, color pattern, blinking pattern, etc.) For example, a lamp 9 or the like, a control means capable of controlling the light emitting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like), and a setting means for setting control data in each of a specific number of control data areas are provided. The control means can control the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern when the control data is set in the control data area, and any one of a specific number of control data areas. When control data is set in the control data area (for example, control data area of any of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5). , Light emission pattern corresponding to the control data set in the one control data area (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect, probability variation winning effect, error effect) It is possible to control the light emitting means so as to emit light by a pattern or the like, and among a specific number of control data areas, a plurality of control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5). When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas , the layer 1 is set in the order of priority among the plurality of control data areas (for example, in ascending order of priority). Layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled so as to emit light with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data set in the control data area set high. During one gaming state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 40 (A), in the case of a slot machine, normal time, etc.), one control data area (for example, layer 2 of the low base state of FIG. 40 (A)). Light emission when control data (for example, control data for notice B effect set in the control data area of layer 2 in the low base state of FIG. 40 (A)) is set in the control data area). One control data area during the pattern and the second game state different from the first game state (for example, the high base state shown in FIG. 40 (A), the chance zone in the case of a slot machine, etc.). Control data to the frequency (e.g., FIG. 40 (control data, etc. of BGM effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 of high base state of A)) Ri and illumination pattern Do different when is set, The setting means sets the control data according to the establishment of the first effect condition and the control data according to the establishment of the second effect condition in a predetermined priority order among a specific number of control data areas. It can be set in only one specific control data area (for example, the control data area of layer 2 of FIG. 45), and the control data corresponding to the establishment of the first effect condition is stored in the specific control data area. If the second effect condition is satisfied when the second effect condition is not set, control data corresponding to the establishment of the second effect condition is set, and the first effect condition is satisfied in the specific control data area. When the second effect condition is satisfied when the control data is set, the priority of the first effect performed by the establishment of the first effect condition is performed by the establishment of the second effect condition. When the priority of the second effect is higher than the priority of the second effect, it is prohibited to set the control data according to the establishment of the second effect condition, and the priority of the first effect is lower than the priority of the second effect. In this case, the control data is set according to the establishment of the second effect condition .

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), which is one aspect of the present invention, is an effect to be executed (for example, a slot machine, etc.). , BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, big prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device that can emit light with multiple types of light emission patterns (for example, color pattern, blinking pattern, etc.) For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) are provided, and the control means is used when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 of FIG. 40 (A)). , Layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, one control data area is Control of any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) including at least a different control data area. When the control data is set in the data area for control, etc.), the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect) , Probability variation winning effect, light emission pattern corresponding to error effect, etc.) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer) When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas of 5, for example, layers 1, layer 2, layer 3, and layers in ascending order of priority. 4. It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the layer 5 or the like is set high, and one control data area (for example, the control of layer 2 in FIG. 45) can be controlled. When control data is set in the control data area, etc.), new control data (control data different from the currently set control data, and actually set in the control data area). It is characterized in that it is provided with a prohibition means (for example, the priority flag of FIG. 45) for prohibiting the setting of the control data or the like.

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be diversified even in the limited control data area, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), which is one aspect of the present invention, is an effect to be executed (for example, a slot machine, etc.). , BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, big prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device that can emit light with multiple types of light emission patterns (for example, color pattern, blinking pattern, etc.) For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) are provided, and the control means is used when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 of FIG. 40 (A)). , Layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, one control data area is Control of any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) including at least a different control data area. When the control data is set in the data area for control, etc.), the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect) , Probability variation winning effect, light emission pattern corresponding to error effect, etc.) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer) When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas of 5, for example, layers 1, layer 2, layer 3, and layers in ascending order of priority. 4. It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the layer 5 etc.) is set high, and in the control data area, the first data area is in ascending order of priority. (For example, a control data area of layer 1 or the like), a second data area (for example, a control data area of layer 2 or the like), and a third data area (for example, a control data area of layer 3 or the like) are provided. As the control data set in the second data area, control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR) is used. There are control data for controlling the light emission and control data for controlling the light emission device to be turned off, and control data (for example, control data for BGM production) is stored in the first data area. If it is set, the extinguishing control data is set in the second data area, and when the extinguishing control data is set, the control data (for example, the large winning opening winning effect) is set in the third data area. It is characterized in that control data, etc.) can be set.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the light emission pattern having a high priority stand out, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machines of (1), (2), and (3) above, the control means is a control data area in which the highest priority is set (for example, control data of layer 5 of FIG. 40 (A)). When control data is set in the area, etc.), it is characterized in that it is controlled so as to emit light in a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the game state.

According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

(5) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), and (4) above, the first control data (for example, the first control data (for example,) that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area. The control data of the notice A effect of FIG. 40 (A) and the second control data that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area, and one game In the state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 40 (A)), the first control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect set in the layer 3 of FIG. 40 (A)) is the second control. A game state (for example, a game state different from one game state) that is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the data for use (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in layer 2 of FIG. 40 (A)). , The high base state of FIG. 40 (B), etc.), the first control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect set in the layer 2 of FIG. 40 (B)) is the second control data (for example, It is characterized in that it is set in the control data area having a lower priority than the notice B effect control data set in the layer 3 of FIG. 40 (B).

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) above, the advance notice α effect set in the control data area of layer 2 of FIG. 46 (A) for control data (for example, One game ends when (control data, etc.) is set (for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine, it starts with the start of the variable display, ends with the stop display of the variable display, and in the case of a slot machine, the game A control data area (for example, FIG. 46 (A)) in which the control of the light emitting device by the control means ends when a person operates the start lever to start the operation and stops the rotation of all the reels. When the control data (for example, the control data area of the layer 2) and the control data (for example, the control data of the hold effect set in the control data area of the layer 1 of FIG. 46B) are set, one A control data area (for example, a control data area of layer 1 in FIG. 46B) is provided so that the control of the light emitting device by the control means is continued regardless of whether or not the game is completed. It is characterized by.

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed across a plurality of games, so that the interest of the games can be improved.

(7) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) above, a special image (for example, active display AH, etc.) including a digestion display (for example, active display AH, etc.) corresponding to variable display is included. It is possible to display an image in which the active display AH and the active display area AHA are combined, and the display mode of the special image has a higher expectation during the variable display (for example, the “star” shown in FIG. 31B. , "Extra-thick" shown in FIG. 32B, etc.), and a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect) that suggests a change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation is shown at a plurality of timings (for example, FIG. 29A). It is characterized in that the degree of expectation that the display mode of the special image changes differs depending on which of the timing 1 and the timing 3) shown in FIG. 32A is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player by paying attention to the execution timing of the specific effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to one aspect of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for a game counted on the side of a main board. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation category and fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the configuration example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variable category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of a prize in the effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode at the time of execution of an active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the 1st system change effect. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of execution of the 1st system change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the control data area. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a time chart which shows the lamp control example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution setting process executed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution setting process executed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 2. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state where it is easy to enter. Although the normally variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The winning by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as the first starting winning. Further, a prize obtained by detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the number of stored first special symbols (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A The first start condition (also referred to as the first execution condition) for executing the variable display game such as (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) executed by the image display device 5 is satisfied. Further, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the number of stored second special symbols (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a figure game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) executed by the image display device 5 is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start winning prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

The first special figure reservation number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed when the first start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the state of waiting for execution). That is, the first special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved first special figures decreases by one each time one of the first start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the first start condition by a certain first start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start prize is not satisfied by the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start prize. Information regarding the above is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the state of waiting for execution). That is, the second special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize that is in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved second special figures is reduced by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the second start condition by a certain second start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is not satisfied by the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize. The information regarding the above is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

When the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning openings". Further, when the first start prize and the second start prize are not particularly distinguished, it is also simply referred to as "start prize". Further, the number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is referred to as "total number of reserved memories". When the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure reserved storage number", but simply "special figure reserved storage number". When referred to as "memory number", it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition" or "execution condition". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition". Further, when the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure reservation information".

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B) of the game board 2. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side portion of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) of a dot matrix or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "special symbol". Also referred to as "second special figure". Further, a game (or the variable display of the identification information itself) executed with the variable display of the identification information is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variablely displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as a "special figure game".

The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special symbol game of a plurality of types composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, each number indicating "0" to "9" should be assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" should be assigned a symbol number of "10". Just do it. The special symbol is not limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) having different combinations of lighting and extinguishing in a 7-segment LED are set in advance as special symbols. It may be displayed.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side portion of the game area (upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) in the game board 2. .. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display to be displayed as possible is performed. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holds for the first special figure game increases by one due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the hold for the first special figure game is held due to the establishment of the new first start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the number of holds of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to display as possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holds for the second special figure game increases by one due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the hold for the second special figure game is held due to the establishment of the new second start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a normal symbol hold display 25C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of reserved memory (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The normal map start condition for executing the normal map game (described later) executed in is satisfied.

The ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like, similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display 20 variably displays (variably displays) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a "general diagram" or "ordinary symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the Fuzu game in which the Fuzu start condition is satisfied but the Fuzu start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as hold data (Public map hold information).

The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages based on the hold data (normal figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The normal figure reservation number is the number of normal figure games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. When the normal figure start condition for executing the normal figure game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, but the normal figure start condition for allowing the start of the normal figure game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established Fuzu game is running), the execution of the Fuzu game is suspended (the Fuzu game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of reserved fuzu games is the number of games of the fuzu game waiting to be executed. The number of reserved normal maps is reduced by 1 each time one condition for starting a normal map is satisfied.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images.

A decorative pattern display area is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, the start of the fluctuation of either the first special figure or the second special figure. Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, corresponding to the end of the special figure game, that is, corresponding to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol, final) that becomes a variable display result. (Also called a stop symbol) is displayed as a stop. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). , The final decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

The decorative design is, for example, eight kinds of designs (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numbers, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, and a combination of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative design has a corresponding design number. As an example, each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8" may be given a symbol number of "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

It should be noted that a stop display that stops and displays the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and ends the variable display, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol (final stop). Stop display to stop and display the variable display to end the variable display, or stop display to stop and display the confirmed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also called the normal symbol display result) and end the variable display. , Complete stop display, final stop display, or derivation display (or simply "deriving"). The fluctuation start timing and fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to coincide with the fluctuation start timing and fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation time). It suffices if the fluctuation time is settled.

That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) may be the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol). It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later), which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed is "0" is stopped and displayed while causing, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction, or is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It includes things such as those that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion and contraction.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL and the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the first hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of the first special figure hold storage is performed, as in the case of the first hold display 25A. That is, the number of the first special figure games currently suspended for execution is displayed in a identifiable manner. In the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the second hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of the second special figure hold storage is performed as in the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games currently suspended for execution is displayed in a identifiable manner.

In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of hold of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first start prize memory display is displayed if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize memory display area 5HL. A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning memory display area 5HL If there is another 1st hold display, the new 1st hold is on the left side of the other 1st hold display (if there are multiple other 1st hold displays, the leftmost side of the leftmost 1st hold display). You may want to add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first start prize memory display area 5HL and the number of hold of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the decrease is the first. The first hold display (the oldest displayed first hold display) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is deleted. The other first hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

Further, in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of holds for the second special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second start prize memory display is displayed if there is no other second hold display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. A new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information on the left side of the area 5HR (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the second start winning memory display area 5HR If there is another second hold display in, the new second hold is on the right side of the other second hold display (or to the right of the rightmost second hold display if there are multiple other second hold displays). You may want to add a display.

In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second start prize memory display area 5HR and the number of hold of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second of the decrease is The second hold display (the oldest displayed second hold display) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is deleted. Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, as a hold display area, in addition to the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second The hold display deleted (moved) from the start prize memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second special figure held information digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA that displays a special image showing information including active display (also called digestion display, this time display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure hold information. (Also referred to as digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display area, current display area, current display area, digestion display area, etc. ) Is arranged, for example, between the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, but is active. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display or an active display such as characters and images displayed around the active display frame and around the active display frame. Information according to the above is displayed by a special image.

In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

An inclination direction sensor unit for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

A voice output member is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are placed at the lower left and right oblique lower parts of the upper plate (upper left and right oblique upper plates of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the game machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the game machine 1.

The production sound includes music, a detection sound, a response sound, a notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, or the like that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (line, a message) or the like output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a prize in the first start winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action to the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action to the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or voice for notifying the push button 31B to request an operation action, or a sound or voice for notifying that the reach state is changed when the reach state (described later) is changed. , Sounds, voices, etc. that give notice or suggest that the state will be changed to the big hit game state before the state is changed to the big hit game state.

An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. ..

A light emitting member (light emitting device) capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, a light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a light emitting member 9H for emitting light on the board surface near the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is installed. Light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are installed at the left and right positions of the variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, 9SR, 9H, 9ATR, and 9ATL are not particularly distinguished, they are collectively referred to as a lamp 9. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a revolving lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed, for example, around each structure in the game area.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are production devices that execute the production, but the game machine 1 may include other production devices such as a production model having a drive unit as the production device. Good.

The arrangement position (installation position) of each configuration is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the normal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal map start condition is satisfied after the normal map start condition is satisfied. In the normal symbol game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started), when the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is obtained. Is stopped and displayed (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is confirmed special. The symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as a "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is the lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, or the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The large winning opening is opened during the period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the rounds may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won a prize in the big winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are the normal open round jackpot symbols, and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state (normal open big hit state), which is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the big prize opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 The door opens the large winning opening during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, elapses, or the period until the predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated. By doing so, a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. The normally open jackpot state is also referred to as the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the jackpot symbol is derived In the jackpot game state as a specific game state (short-term open jackpot state), the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state, which is advantageous for the player, is shorter than the first period in the normally open jackpot state (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door). .1 second). In the short-term open jackpot state, the opening period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the number of second rounds (for example, "2") less than the number of first rounds (for example, "15") in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open jackpot state, if a game ball wins in the big winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot game state in which no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as the second specific game state.

Further, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term open round specific gaming state is not limited to the one in which the opening period of the big winning opening is shorter than that of the jackpot gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state. The period (upper limit time) is the same for the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, while in the short-term open round specific game state, the maximum number of times (for example, 2 times) to open the large winning opening is It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the jackpot game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period for changing the big winning opening to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. It is sufficient that the second period is short and the number of rounds executed is at least one of the number of second rounds, which is less than the number of first rounds in the normally open round specific game state. ..

After the special symbol indicating the number "2", which is the small hit symbol, is derived as the definite special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hit game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the large winning opening to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player, as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B are used. In response to the start of any special figure game among the games, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. It may be in a predetermined reach state that forms part of a combination of indications.

The reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as a "reach variable symbol"). Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, the reach state is also referred to as the reach is established (reach is established). The reach state is also referred to as reach variation. Further, a state in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed and the reach is not changed is called a normal change.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect (or reach effect display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like are performed before the reach state is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, a reach mode of normal reach and a reach mode of super reach, which has a higher expectation of big hit than normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

The expectation of a big hit is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) x (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) x (probability of being a big hit) + (probability of being a big hit) It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed other than time) x (probability that it does not become a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation becomes "1", the variable display result always becomes "big hit").

Further, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by the variable display operation of the decorative symbol or the like can be executed. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative symbol in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped display area (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area) By changing the decorative symbol again in either one or both of the 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R) and then stopping the display, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are variable. By executing the display again, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, or the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

In the pseudo-continuous production, a fixed decoration that results in a variable display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. By the time the symbol is derived and displayed, all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-ream chance eye is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). (Or displayed on all) is temporarily stopped, and then the re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variable display of all the decorative symbols again, is specified in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It can be performed once (for example, up to 4 times).

In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (re-variable display times) in the pseudo-continuous production is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Number of times (1 time), number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (1 time), and re-variable between initial variable display and final variable display It is grasped as the number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) that is one less than the total number of times (X + 2). Further, the number of re-variable display is the same as the number of times when all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (the number of temporary stops) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-ream, and the second variable display (first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-ream. The 3rd variable display (2nd revariable display) to the 3rd temporary stop display is also called the 3rd pseudo-ream, and the 4th variable display (3rd revariable display) to the 4th temporary stop display is displayed. Also called the 4th pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-series in the pseudo-series effect is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of revariable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. It should be noted that increasing the number of pseudo-reams such as the first, second, third, ... Is also referred to as "pseudo-ream continues".

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the revariable display (revariation) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started 2 to 5 times in a row.

In the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream chance is temporarily stopped in any part or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R before the reach is established (before the reach is reached) in the fluctuation. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after the reach is established, any part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are temporarily stopped. That is, there are at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is displayed before the reach state and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach state is reached. You may.

The sliding effect (similar to the pseudo-continuous effect) is to give notice or suggest to the player that one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the big hit expectation is high. You may. Hereinafter, an effect for giving notice or suggesting to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the sliding effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the advance notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the sliding effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display and a message window display may be used. , Hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), etc. may use an effect operation different from the variable display effect.

In the present embodiment, as a notice effect, it is common when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. Includes common effects performed in. In addition, the advance notice effect includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after the common effect is executed.
The notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. Further, the suggestion effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, as in the common effect. In other words, a production that suggests that a common effect is executed is called a suggestion effect, and an effect that suggests that either a success effect or a failure effect is executed (common effect or common effect). Another effect) may be referred to as a suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether or not the content of the advance notice or suggestion is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol due to the winning of a certain game ball may be in the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, the notice effect that gives notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" is at least the final decoration symbol due to the winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. Anything that is executed (started) before may be used.

The advance notice effect may include a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as "preliminary determination advance notice effect"). In the pre-reading notice effect, before starting the variable display that is the target of the notice, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game. (Look ahead), it is a notice effect to be executed based on the judgment result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and the target hold information is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the target is also referred to as the variable display of the target. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the hold information of the target (when it is executed during the digestion process of the hold information of the target including the variable display of the target), and before the hold information of the target. It may be executed during the digestion of the pending information, the digestion of the pending information of the target, and the digestion of the pending information before the pending information of the target.

In the production operation that becomes the pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball, the player decides whether or not the content announced by the pre-reading notice effect is realized after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied). It suffices as long as it is executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a pre-reading advance notice effect for notifying (suggesting) a player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative symbol due to the winning of the game ball. Anything may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the effect of the game ball, which is a pre-reading notice effect for notifying (suggesting) the player in advance that the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the winning of a certain game ball, is It suffices if the final decoration symbol by winning is executed (started) before the stop display is displayed.

The pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize memory display area 5HL, and a hold change effect in the first start prize memory display area 5HL. An action effect such as a hold change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. Further, the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination advance notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR, and a hold change effect in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. An action effect such as a hold change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. A definite decoration that becomes a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as "non-probability variable jackpot combination") among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations after a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, the same type of normal symbol (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbol") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination that displays the final stop. As an example of a normal symbol, among eight types of decorative symbols having symbol numbers "1" to "8", four types of decorative symbols having even-numbered symbol numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" Is.

In response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a normal jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. , It is called a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "non-probability variation" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed.

By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. Of the multiple types of jackpot combinations, a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is performed after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed in response to the reach state. The confirmed decorative pattern that becomes is sometimes displayed as a stop. In other words, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decorative symbol which is the predetermined probabilistic jackpot combination is finally stopped and the decorative symbol which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. It may be done. The predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same type of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of a probabilistic symbol is an odd number of "1", "3", "5", and "7" among eight kinds of decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are "1" to "8". Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decoration symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game has a variable display result of "big hit". It is also referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "probability change" in the case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is performed again in the big hit game state is satisfied.
As with the time saving control, the probability variation control may be terminated when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, even if the probability change control is terminated when the "probability change fall" decision to end the probability change control is made in the probability change fall lottery that is executed every time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot game state. Good.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal" compared to the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per normal" The second is to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the second special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is shortened until it becomes a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability variation control is also called a high probability high base state. A probabilistic state in which only probabilistic control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also called a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control is sometimes referred to as a "probability change state", and in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base state, it may be referred to as a time reduction probability change state. On the other hand, the probability variation state (high accuracy low base state) in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed may be a probability variation state without time reduction in order to distinguish it from the high accuracy high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without the probability change control is also called the low probability high base state. The normal state in which the probability change control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special figure game) By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game will be a "big hit", the player will be in an advantageous state. A gaming state that is advantageous for a player different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state. In the following description, when the term "high base state" is simply used, it means a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state. When simply described as "low base state", it means a high probability low base state or a low probability low base state.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may not be in the reach state, and any combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, a fixed decorative pattern that has a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a short-term open round jackpot symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "sudden probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden change big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "sudden probability", it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and after the end, the probability change control may be performed together with the time saving control.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the game is controlled to the small hit game state. After that, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result becomes "small hit". However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state reaches a predetermined number when the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and become the normal state.

A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the decorative symbols that are normally a jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, they are changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned, and the probability variable jackpot combination is used. Either the decorative symbol (probability variation symbol) or the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is a normal jackpot combination may be displayed as the final stop display as the final decorative symbol.

After the definite decorative symbol, which is usually a big hit combination, is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds is completed in the big hit game state, during the execution of the round in the big hit game state or in the big hit game state. During the jackpot game state, which is the probabilistic notification effect of whether or not to control the probabilistic state during the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game in the jackpot game state. A promotion effect may be performed. It should be noted that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is finished is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, a speaker 8, and a lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as 9 are installed. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speaker 8, light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) of the lamp 9, and all or part of the extinguishing operation. , It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and emits light (lights, lights, lights) in the lamp 9 or the like based on commands from the effect control board 12 and control data. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lights off (blinking, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 also has other switches connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). ) May be provided, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command for designating a variable pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), different EXT data are used depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the decision result of the big hit type. Is set.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the customer waiting demonstration display.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state, for example. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A has been satisfied.

The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the first special figure reserved memory number identifiable in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. .. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like so as to be identifiable.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved memory information, a first start opening prize designation command or a second start opening prize designation command for designating whether the first start win entry has been started or the second start win entry has been started is used. At the same time as transmitting, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. When the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages designated to indicate that the number of reserved storages in the first special figure or the second special figure has increased (the first designated command to add the number of reserved memory or the second) While sending the hold storage number addition designation command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicating that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. (1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total hold storage number addition designation command (total hold storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number may be transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" as a winning judgment result, and a judgment result of the big hit type. is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as a determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is the group name of each group including the variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group. The command E0XXH is an effect control command (error specification command) indicating the occurrence of an error and its content (type).

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (see FIG. 15A), when the starting winning is generated, the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is judged whether or not it is a big hit or whether it is decided as a "small hit", and if it is decided as a "big hit", the type of the big hit is judged based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variable category The fluctuation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command and the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type based on the value set in the symbol designation command. In addition to being recognizable, the variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the variable category command.

The effect control commands such as the variable pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). .. Hereinafter, the effect control command used for controlling the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used for controlling the sound output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. In addition, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category, and the general drawing. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

Next, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes "non-reach variation pattern" ("non-reach loss variation pattern" and "non-reach") corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" among the cases where the variable display result is "loss". (Also referred to as "loss) fluctuation pattern") "and" reach fluctuation pattern "(" reach loss fluctuation pattern "" corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" among the cases where the variable display result is "loss". Also called) ”is included.

Further, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as "hit fluctuation pattern". The hit fluctuation pattern includes a "big hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" and a "small hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit". As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times in response to the time reduction control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large or when the game state is the probability change state or the time reduction state. It is good. As a result, by selecting one of the fluctuation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the game state, it is possible to control to shorten the fluctuation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the game state.

For the fluctuation patterns including the reach effect such as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns according to the reach mode of each reach effect are prepared. The variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a "normal reach variation pattern", and the variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect is executed is referred to as a "super reach variation pattern".

FIG. 5 shows specific examples of fluctuation categories and fluctuation patterns in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1". The variable category "PA2" is a non-reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA2-1" to "PA2-3" belong to the variation category "PA2". The variable category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the variation category "PA3". The fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA4-1" to "PA4-4" belong to the variation category "PA4". The fluctuation category "PA5" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA5-1" to "PA5-4" belong to the variation category "PA5". The variable category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the variation category "PB3". The variable category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-4" belong to the variation category "PB4". The variable category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB5-1" to "PB5-4" belong to the variation category "PB5".

The variation pattern "PA2-1" belonging to the variation category "PA2" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a sliding effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA1" is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1".

The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA3-2" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gap. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a ghost.
The fluctuation pattern "PA4-3" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA4-4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PA5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA5" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA5-2" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The fluctuation pattern "PA5-3" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA5-4" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB3-2" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern "PB4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern "PB4-2" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The fluctuation pattern "PB4-3" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB4-4" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern "PB5-2" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The fluctuation pattern "PB5-3" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB5-4" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

Although the description of the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot type is abrupt among the small hit fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern is omitted in FIG. 5, the loss fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, non-reach fluctuation pattern) described in FIG. It is the same as the reach loss fluctuation pattern) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern (except when the jackpot type is sudden).

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11 and drawings. The data constituting the table as shown in 5 is stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6 (A) and the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 6 (B) are used. It is prepared in advance. In the first special symbol display result determination table 130A, a definite special symbol having a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A. Previously, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" for determining the special figure display result. It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 of. In the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, a definite special symbol that becomes a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" for determining the special figure display result. It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 of.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the disorder for determining the special figure display result is disturbed depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Since such a setting does not result in a "small hit" in the second special figure game, a normally variable winning ball device 6B such as a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state) is formed. In a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a "small hit" in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

It should be noted that the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned different predetermined range determination values to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table in the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". The table referenced for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. Depending on whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "probability change". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as the variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (also referred to as the variable special figure). A value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while when the second special figure game is executed, if the variable special figure is the second special figure, A decision value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since it is not "probable" in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult "probability" and prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game.

It should be noted that different predetermined values may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" depending on whether the variable special map is the first special figure or the variable special figure is the second special figure. .. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variable category determination table that is referred to for determining the variable category to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variable category determination tables in which the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the variable category determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category is assigned to each of the variable categories. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are different from each other. There is. Instead of the plurality of variable category determination tables, one large variable category determination table including the information of all the variable category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns are different from each other. There is. Instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including the information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like (for example, special figure). Process flags, etc.). Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. It includes a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but has not yet started. The hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like are stored as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated, but has not yet started. The hold data (second special figure hold information) of (the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game balls. Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

In addition, the hold data of the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special symbol hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C holds hold data (normal figure hold) related to the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information) is memorized. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as hold data (general figure hold information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 receives a first reserved storage number count value and a second special figure reserved storage number, which are stored values of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number. The second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter for counting, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total hold storage number, etc. Be remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

The effect control board 12 is used to transmit wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the voice control board 13. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illuminated signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to for determining the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination ratios of the respective display modes are different from each other. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each of the display modes of the first hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table containing information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table referred to for determining the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination ratios of the respective display modes are different from each other. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each of the display modes of the second hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table containing information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect) is executed. Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the execution presence / absence of the hold effect, respectively, with and without execution of the hold effect Is assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start prize memory display area 5HL to a notice mode, and is displayed in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. It is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to the notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5, but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not an active display change effect (successful effect) that changes a special image including an active display is executed. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, respectively, with and without execution of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect of changing the special image into a notice mode (main notice effect). In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information according to the active display (for example, characters and images displayed around the active display or the active display or around the active display frame) are used as a notice mode. It is a production to change (main notice production). As described above, the active display change effect includes a common effect, a success effect (also called an active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and a common effect. It includes a failure effect (also called an active display change effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 but is a special image. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

Further, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect in which the mode of the special image is changed to one of a plurality of modes by changing the mode of the first system, and a change in the mode of the special image in the second system. A second system change effect that changes to any one of a plurality of aspects is included. The first system change effect has a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. , There are common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is the effect in the special image. The display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) is changed.

Further, the ROM 121 is referred to in the ROM 121 for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing such as which timing to execute in the fluctuation). The execution timing determination table of the effect is stored. In this first system change effect, the rate at which the success effect related to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of production execution timing determination tables for the first system change effect, in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. You may be. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect. There is. Further, instead of the plurality of execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect, one large execution timing determination table of the first system change effect including the information of all the execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

Further, the ROM 121 is referred to in the ROM 121 for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing such as which timing to execute in the fluctuation). The execution timing determination table of the effect is stored. In this second system change effect, the rate at which the success effect related to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the second system change effect, in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. You may be. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect. There is. Further, instead of the plurality of execution timing determination tables of the second system change effect, one large execution timing determination table of the second system change effect including the information of all the execution timing determination tables of the second system change effect is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 has a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect and their respective determination ratios are different from each other. The effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of this active display change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect and a second system are displayed for each execution timing. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, and a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the execution timing determination table of the plurality of active display change effects, one large execution timing determination table including the information of the execution timing determination tables of all the active display change effects is stored in the ROM 121. May be good.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random number value for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect (not shown) is provided for each of the effect patterns of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as how many changes will be executed later). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect may be assigned to each execution timing in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including the information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the other main notice effect of the above-mentioned active display change effect to any one of a plurality of types. You may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main advance notice effect pattern determination tables in which the types of main advance notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main advance notice effect pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. It suffices if the main notice effect pattern determination table is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main advance effect pattern for each of the main advance notice effect patterns. Good.
Instead of the plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all the main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect to any one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern is assigned to each of the hold change effect pattern determination tables in the hold change effect pattern determination table. Just do it.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gassing effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the hold change gassing effect is executed. In this case, in the hold change Gase effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether to execute the hold change Gase effect is used for each of the hold change Gase effect without execution and with execution. The determined value) may be assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as how many changes will be executed later). .. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change Gase effect execution timing determination tables in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. .. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect may be assigned to each execution timing in the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table. .. Instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect effect to any one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change Gase effect pattern determination table, each of the hold change Gase effect patterns has a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change Gase effect pattern. It may be assigned.

Further, the ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digestion display mode determination table”) referred to for determining the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any one of a plurality of types. ) May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the display mode determination table of the active display, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display may be assigned to each of the display modes of the active display. That is, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes in which the determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display display modes are different from each other. It suffices if the decision table is stored. Instead of the display mode determination table of the plurality of active displays, one large display mode determination table of the active display including the information of the display mode determination tables of all the active displays may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 is configured with a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, a model for effect, etc.). The data to be used is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative patterns and advance notice effects (including pre-read notice effects) are realized.

The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is a decoration in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the finalized special symbol that is the special symbol display result. A variable display operation of a symbol, a reach effect, a re-lottery effect, or various other effects that do not involve a variable display of a decorative symbol (for example, hold for a display mode of a hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL). It is composed of data showing the control contents of various effects such as the effect and the hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR).

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It suffices that the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer 120. ), And the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control or the like may be set corresponding to a predetermined control content or processing content such as that.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of an effect sound or the like linked to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as an operation button 30, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the speaker 8 is controlled to output voice in the mode specified by the voice control data, and the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data, and the operation specified by the operation detection control data is performed. During the valid period, it receives operations on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and controls to determine the effect content. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and so on) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Advance the control of the movable members of the production model). In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, and the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n indicate the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of the effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data # n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM to develop the display control unit 123. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. ..

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The reception command buffer 194A at the time of winning the first start is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages. .. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the hold storage number notification command (1st hold storage number notification command) ) Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer 194A so that among these commands, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores commands in the order received at the time of the first start winning from the beginning in the free area of the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start winning. At the time of the first start winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the first starting opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4". The category command and the first hold storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "3".

The commands stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening winning designation command is displayed. One stored command (1 set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening winning designation command). The command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the stored state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is deleted. , The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" are shifted to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "3" is changed to the buffer number "2". To be shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages. .. When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the hold storage number notification command (the second hold storage number notification command) ) Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer 194B so that among these commands, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start winning from the beginning in the free area of the second start winning command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the second starting opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4", respectively. , The variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "2".

The commands stored in the second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening winning designation command is displayed. One stored command (1 set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command). The command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the stored state shown in FIG. 10 (C), the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the buffer number "1".

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first read-ahead notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A. That is, in the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". Will be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol or the like. In the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, in the first start winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10 (B), the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is used in another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol. When shifting to a number, in the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the second pre-reading advance notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second read-ahead notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data constituting the second start winning command buffer 194B. That is, in the second pre-reading advance notice buffer 194D, the decision contents regarding the pre-reading advance notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". Will be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning command buffer 194B of FIG. 10 (C) due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol or the like. In the second read-ahead notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc., in the second start winning command buffer 194B of FIG. 10 (C), the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is the other buffer. When shifting to a number, in the second read-ahead notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). At this time, if necessary, for example, after the main side error processing is completed, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the effect control is performed from the main board 11. An error specification command is transmitted to the board 12. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step). S13).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and is movable in the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of the wing piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off from. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the processes executed in steps S208 and S211 of FIG. 13 as the start winning process. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number value determination process.

In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not it is "4") (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (step S202; Step S207).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes). After executing the process of step S209, the second start port switch 22B is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Determines whether or not is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the second special figure game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not it is "4") (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (step S204; Step S210).

After executing the process of step S207, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is "0 (initialized)" (step S209), and the process of step S203 is executed. Proceed to. After executing the process of step S210, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is set to "0 (initialization)" (step S212), and the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211), the CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of special figure reserved storages corresponding to the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer (step S215 in FIG. 14). .. For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storages is updated to be added by 1 (step S216). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category are extracted (step S217). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Following the process of step S218, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step S219, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step S220). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step S221). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

As a winning random number value determination process (step S220), the CPU 103 confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example, to confirm the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. (Step S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of step S401, the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current value are obtained from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data for determining the special figure display result to be used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the game state is selected (step S402). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the determined values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of step S402. It suffices to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" is issued to the effect control board 12. Make settings for transmission (step S405).

If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is issued to the effect control board 12. And make settings for transmission (step S407).

When it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. A setting is made for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 (step S410).

After executing any of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable categories stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations in which the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Select one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the table to be used from the table).

Specifically, the CPU 103 uses the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404, etc.) and the hold storage number (for example, the first hold storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Select one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the used table based on the stored value (such as the first hold storage count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses a variable category determination table set as a used table and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on this, one of the variable categories is determined from among a plurality of types of variable categories.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a selection example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variable category determination table. The configuration example of this variable category determination table is four types of variable category tables that are referred to for determining one of a plurality of types of variable categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on a variable category determination table among the above four types (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure). FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on yet another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on yet another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For the sake of simplification of the description, the variable category determination table in which the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 17 (A) is set may be simply referred to as the variable category determination table in FIG. 17 (A). The same applies to FIGS. 17 (B) to 17 (D) and other determination tables such as the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which one of the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (D) is selected, that is, the above-described above. This is a selection example of selecting one of the variable category determination tables from the four types of variable category determination tables.

The variable category determination table "C-TBL1" of FIG. 17 (A) (the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" of FIG. 17 (B), the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" of FIG. 17 (C), FIG. 17 In the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" of (D), numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category are assigned to a plurality of types of variable categories.

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 17 (A), 0 out of 100 determined values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of "0" to "99") are variable categories. Assigned to "PA1", 70 (values in the range "0" to "69") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", 27 (values in the range "70" to "96") are variable categories Assigned to "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variable category "PA5". There is. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1" of FIG. 17A, the fluctuation category "PA1" is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA2" is 70% (70 ÷ 100), and so on. The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variable category “PA4” is determined at a ratio of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variable category “PA5” is determined at a ratio of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" of FIG. 17B, 4 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "3") are assigned to the variable category "PA1", 85 (values in the range of "4" to "88") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", and 8 (values in the range "89"). (Values in the range of "96") are assigned to the variable category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "PA4"). 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" in FIG. 17B, the variable category "PA1" is 4% (4 ÷ 100), and the variable category "PA2" is 85% (85 ÷ 100). The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 8% (8/100), the variable category "PA4" is determined at a ratio of 2% (2/100), and the variable category "PA5" is determined at a ratio of 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" of FIG. 17 (C), 64 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "63") are assigned to the variable category "PA1", 25 (values in the range of "64" to "88") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", and 8 (values in the range "89"). (Values in the range of "96") are assigned to the variable category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "PA4"). 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" of FIG. 17 (C), the variable category "PA1" is 64% (64/100), and the variable category "PA2" is 25% (25/100). The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 8% (8/100), the variable category "PA4" is determined at a ratio of 2% (2/100), and the variable category "PA5" is determined at a ratio of 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" of FIG. 17 (D), 20 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "19") are assigned to the variable category "PB3", 40 (values in the range of "20" to "59") are assigned to the variable category "PB4", and 40 (values in the range "60"). (Values in the range of "99") are assigned to the variable category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" in FIG. 17 (D), the variable category "PB3" is 20% (20/100), the variable category "PB4" is 40% (40/100), and so on. The variable category "PB5" is determined at a rate of 40% (40/100).

In the setting examples of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the special figure display result is "missing", when the number of reserved memories is large, it is shortened / non-reach (as compared with when the number of reserved memories is small). Loss) The decision rate of the variable category (variable category "PA1") is high. Specifically, the determination ratio "64%" of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "4". > The determination ratio "4%" of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "3" or "2". > The determination ratio of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "1" is set to "0%".

Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the special figure display result is "loss", the fluctuation category of super reach (loss) regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is large or small (loss). The determination ratio of the variable category "PA4" or the variable category "PA5") is fixed. Specifically, regardless of which of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination ratio of the variable category "PA5" is ". It is set to "1%" and the determination rate of the variable category "PA4" is set to "2%".

Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" is used. Even if there is, there is a determined value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variable category (the same variable category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the same variable category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is any of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variable category "PA5" is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variable category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables.

Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "89" to "96", the variable category "PA3" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variable category "PA2" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (value in each of the above ranges), it will be reach, super reach, super reach α or super reach β in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting example of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1”, The variable category "PA1" or "PA2" is determined by either the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" or the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". Thereby, at least it can be easily determined in advance that the reach is not reached.

After that, according to the determination result (decision result) by the process of step S412, any of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 15B is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step). S413), the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Will be done. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern specification command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes transmission setting processing for transmitting such as. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. For example, each time the special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is decremented or incremented by 1 to obtain the first value. 1 The first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the special symbol display device 4A, or the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless of the game), the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing in step S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set the settings. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is open may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for opening the big prize opening is set to "29 seconds", and the big prize is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open jackpot state. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period for opening the big prize opening is set to "0.1 seconds" corresponding to the big hit type "probability", and the number of times the big winning opening is opened, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-term open jackpot state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. ..

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending the jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9 elapses. It includes a process of waiting until, and a process of making various settings for starting probability change control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". By setting "0.1 seconds" and setting the number of times the large winning opening is opened to "15 times", the small hit game state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When returning the large winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, an effect device such as an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, or the like waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Processing to be done is included. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total hold storage count value stored by the total hold storage counter to be subtracted by 1. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just do it.

In this way, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved second special figures is "0", the first special figure game and the second special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the figure game is reserved, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. The second special figure game is not limited to the mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). ), And the special figure games (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) occur. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine whether to execute the first special figure game or the second special figure game from the stored data.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the figure is used as a table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Similar to the process of step S402 shown in 15 (A), the table data for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the table to be used according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of step S239, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the table to be used, and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2". In that case, the second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the table to be used. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" (step S240).

After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the variable random number buffer can be changed to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type is matched (step S244).

Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined. To memorize. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probability", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

Whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state when it is determined in step S246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S246; No), or after any of the processes of steps S245 and S247 is executed. A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of whether or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S248).

After the finalized special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S250), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the CPU 103 uses the random number MR3 for determining the variation category and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is extracted.

As described above, when the judgment value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same fluctuation category exists in any of the fluctuation category determination tables according to the number of reserved storages, the same fluctuation category is supported. When the random number value MR3 matching the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved storages is determined between the execution of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) and the execution of the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Even if they are significantly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number value determination process. For example, in the specific example of the variable category determination tables "C-TBL1" to "C-TBL3" described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, "99", the prize is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The variation category "PA5" is determined in both the hourly random value determination process and the variation pattern setting process. Further, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" can be used in both the winning random number value determination process and the variation pattern setting process regardless of the number of reserved memories. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the random value MR3 for determining the variable category stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly determines the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. The variable category may be determined by using the extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variable category newly extracted.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation category by using the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the variable category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved storages, and the selected variable category determination is performed. The variable category is determined based on the table and the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the used table from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101 based on the variation category which is the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the table to be used and the numerical data indicating the above-mentioned random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern. To determine.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the fluctuation category. FIG. 19A is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss)”) among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss)”) among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 19 (D) to 19 (H).

As described above, in the start winning determination process in step S101, the main board 11 is set to transmit the start opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 ( Step S219), transmission settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in steps S403, S404, S409, etc. are made (steps S405, S407, S410), and the determination is made in step S412. The transmission setting (step S413) for transmitting the variable category command according to the variable category is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, hold storage number notification Four commands (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

Further, on the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the like. Is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process in step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern specification command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like are executed. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are made. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variable pattern specification command, and the like are included in one timer interrupt. Will be sent in bulk to.
Note that the command is not limited to those that are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110). Whether or not to control the game state or the small hit game state is determined, and the specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). The content determined by the effect control command of is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or "big hit" is performed by the winning random number value determination process (step S220). Judgment as to whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state as a "small hit", a rough variable display mode (variable category) of a decorative pattern, etc. are performed, and it is determined by each production control command. The contents are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.

When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is generated from the main board 11 in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control that becomes an effect control command or the like is performed from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and the command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading thereof. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued production control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in step S74, the error notification process, which is one of the error effects, is executed (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, the error image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the error audio output operation from the speaker 8, and the error in the lamp 9 correspond to the error designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Error notification is performed by light emission operation or the like. Next, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process of step S76, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emitting operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the above, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for the effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S72.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S74 of FIG. 20 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, so that the reception command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is transmitted. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Just do it.

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S504). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the reception command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first hold storage number notification command (step S508). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step S508; Yes), for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer, the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (step S509). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step S510). Then, when the second hold storage number notification command is used (step S510; Yes), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). ..

When the receive command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), when the receive command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or in steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the processes of, if the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is sent. After storing the command at the beginning of the free area in the 1 start winning command buffer 194A (step S512), the process returns to the process of step S501.

Further, when the reception command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), when the reception command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or in steps S503, S505, S509. , After executing any of the processes of S511, if the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the beginning of the free area in the second start winning command buffer 194B (step S512), and then returns to the process of step S501.

When the first hold storage number notification command is received together with the first fluctuation start command, the hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the first start winning command buffer 194A.

Further, when the second hold storage number notification command is received together with the second fluctuation start command, the hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 194B at the time of the second start winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the second start winning command buffer 194B.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), settings according to other reception commands are made (step S513), and then the process returns to step S501. For example, when the reception command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the reception command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not the time is shortened.

Start opening prize designation command (1st start opening prize designation command or 2nd start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, hold storage number notification command (1st hold storage number notification command, 2 hold storage number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start-up prize is generated, such as a notification command), is also referred to as a start-up prize command. Further, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, the first start opening winning designation command, and the second start opening winning designation command are also referred to as hold storage information. The symbol designation command and the variable category command are also referred to as determination result information.

When the reception commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning, which of the symbol specification command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command is stored. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

Further, when the reception commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the reception command buffer 194B at the time of the second start winning, which of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the second hold storage number notification command is stored. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the effect determination process at the time of winning (step S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S150 of FIG. 22 as the effect determination process at the time of winning.

In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the starting winning command buffer (first starting winning command buffer 194A or second starting winning command buffer 194B). The check is performed (step S151), and it is determined whether or not the first start opening winning designation command is received as a new reception command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning command has not been received (step S152; No), the stored contents in the second start winning command buffer 194B are checked (step S153), and a new command is checked. It is determined whether or not the second start opening winning designation command is received as the reception command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the winning effect determination process ends.

When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), when it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened. (Step S155: NO) executes the first hold effect determination process (step S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed.
In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect for the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed, whether to execute the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect in the step. It is sufficient to perform a process of determining whether or not to execute, a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect, and the like.

First, a determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variable category. FIG. 24A shows a hold display mode selected when the variable category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” or the variable category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table (H-TBL1). FIG. 24B shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA4 (super reach α (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. An example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 24 (D) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA5 (super reach β (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. (H-TBL4). FIG. 24 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category "PB3 (normal reach (big hit))" is selected among the above seven types. It is an example of setting the determination ratio of the aspect (H-TBL5). FIG. 24 (F) is a hold selected when the variable category "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" is selected among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL6) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. FIG. 24 (G) shows the variable category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL7) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when.

According to FIG. 24, for example, in the case of reach, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is more difficult to determine blue and white (initial color) than in the case of non-reach. Further, in the case of reach, red and yellow are more likely to be determined, and blue and white are less likely to be determined when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 16, 17 and 24, when the special figure display result is "big hit", red or yellow is more likely to be determined than when the special figure display result is "missing", and blue or blue. It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation that a hot effect will be executed and a big hit than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed and the degree of expectation that it will be a big hit are high.

That is, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the decision table, and is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display to be displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined content of the first hold effect determination process based on the decision result of the first hold effect determination process (step S161). .. Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to correspond to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the decision content (hold change) of the hold change determination process. Execution timing when executing the effect, execution timing when executing the hold change effect, execution timing when executing the hold change) 1st start win reception command corresponding to the buffer number in the buffer 194A. 1 The decision content of the hold effect determination process (information indicating that the hold change effect is executed (for example, a flag), information indicating that the hold change effect is executed (for example), in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading notice buffer 194C. Information that identifies the hold display (that is, the hold display due to the first start winning prize) that is changed by the hold effect as the hold display of the target (eg, the flag) and the information indicating that the hold change is executed (for example, the flag). , The buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning may be stored.

In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold memory number, the display mode at the time of addition is "white" and the hold effect is "executed (hold change effect is executed)". When the execution timing is determined as "next fluctuation", the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning (for example, the buffer number "3". The display mode "white" at the time of addition is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number "3") of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the execution timing "next variation". 1 Receive command at the time of start winning. It is indicated that the hold change effect is executed in association with the buffer number (buffer number "1") of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") in the buffer 194A. The indicated information and the buffer number "3" may be stored.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, the buffer in the first start winning command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only the information that identifies the target hold display (hold display due to the first start winning) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (hold change effect is executed). You do not have to memorize the information indicating that you want to do it).

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A). A new hold display is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL based on the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first. The hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect is produced. The hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (step S154; Yes). Step S156: YES), the second hold effect determination process is executed (step S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the second start winning memory display area 5HR is additionally displayed.
In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect for the hold display when the second start winning memory display area 5HR is additionally displayed, whether to execute the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect in the step. It is sufficient to perform a process of determining whether or not to execute, a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect, and the like.

The processing of each of step S163, step S164, and step S165 related to the second starting opening winning is the same as the processing related to each of the processes of step S160, step S161, and step S162 related to the first starting opening winning. Since it is possible to read "first" as "second" in each step and read the code corresponding to the reading, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), and it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is shortened (step S152). S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the initial color (white), and receives the command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning. The first hold display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content in (step S166). Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened. (Step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), and at the time of the second start winning. The second hold display of the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored contents in the received command buffer 194B. (Step S166). Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

After executing the winning effect determination process in step S150 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the following steps S170 to S170 depend on the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191. One of the processes of 177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, or the like transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the display device 5. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform variable display of the above and other various effects, the process of determining the fixed decorative symbol according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result, and shifting the first hold display or the second hold display to activate Processing to display a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display which is the main notice effect). It includes a process of determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display during effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) are performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs the effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various effect controls such as control to output the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control to output the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / blink the lamp 9 are executed.

After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command has elapsed. The variable display result can be fixed by autonomously deriving and displaying the finalized decorative symbol on the side of the effect control board 12 without using the effect control command from the main board 11. When the final decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6" corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. Update to. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Update to "4". In addition, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set content, and steps S172. Similar to the effect processing during variable display, various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11. ..

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and steps S172. Similar to the effect processing during variable display, various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the set content, and displays it in a variable manner in step S172. Similar to the medium effect processing, various effect controls in the big hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the jackpot game state, reads out various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect processing, various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S522; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. In the non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1", "PA2-1", "PA2-2", "PA2-3" in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". It is determined whether or not there is (step S523).

If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols serving as the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left fixed symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative symbols.

Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is used. Of the finalized decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is used. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. In the process of step S524, it is sufficient to determine the definite decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance item symbol in response to the case where the variable symbol advance notice is being executed.

If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Determine the decorative symbols with the same symbol number. Further, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the medium-fixed symbol updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S522; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", or the special figure display. It is determined whether the result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S526). When it is determined to be "sudden" or "small hit" (step S526; Yes), a definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "sudden" or "small hit" such as the opening chance eye. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

When it is determined in step S526 that the game is "non-probable" or "probable" other than "probability" or "small hit" (step S526; No), the final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination is the final decorative symbol. The combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol updated by a random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is extracted, and then stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot confirmation symbol determination table or the like, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Determine decorative symbols with the same symbol number. At this time, even if a decision is made to make a different decorative symbol a definite decorative symbol depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variation" or "probable variation" and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the jackpot. Good.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", select one of a plurality of types of normal symbols to determine the definite decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probability variation jackpot combination. Just do it. When the jackpot type is "probability variation", one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected to form a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, if the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display is not performed, and the game is executed in response to the jackpot game state. It suffices to be notified that the probabilistic state is controlled by the promotion effect during the big hit. On the other hand, when the final decoration symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect is performed.

When it is specified that the time is not shortened in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (step S155: NO), after executing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, the process is suspended. The process is executed (step S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the decorative symbol changes in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol this time is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning prize memory display area Display the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL in the active display area AHA (special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 1st start winning memory display area 5HL. To display). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as the usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display the first start prize memory. The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when starting to change the decorative pattern in conjunction with the second special figure game.

Further, in the process of step S531, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, the other hold display is first displayed. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize memory display area 5HR.

After executing the process of step S531, the effect execution setting process is executed (step S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, a process of determining the type of active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active operation at the time of execution. Includes processing to determine the effect mode of the display change effect, process to determine the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing, process to set (or reset) the effect control pattern based on these determination results, etc. It has been. Details will be described later.

After executing the process of step S532, the execution setting of the effect during other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, the execution setting of the "one-shot notification effect" that immediately notifies (determinically notifies) that the variable display result becomes the "big hit" by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission is set. You may. Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the jackpot notification light emission is the light emission of the flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of step S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the effect of a predetermined mode may be executed, for example, for liveliness. For example, the effect of a mode in which a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, light emitting member 9SL, 9SR) emits light may be executed.

After executing the process of step S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (step S534). .. Subsequently, the variation display or the like start setting process for setting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535). For example, the image is displayed by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 included in the effect control pattern set as the effect pattern used in the effect execution setting process in step S532. The sound on the speaker 8 is set by setting to start the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 5 and transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Settings for starting output, setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 by transmitting an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the above-mentioned effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14 are performed. ..

After executing the process of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A or the second starting winning command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is the most command associated with the first start winning command buffer 194A when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the small buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (1st start opening winning designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the reception command buffer at the time of the second start winning. The commands (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands are deleted, and the commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command are deleted. , Shift while maintaining the winning order.

Further, in the process of step S536, the information stored in the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. .. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S537), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and a process of determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active). The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table.
In the setting example, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the active display change effect and the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the type of the active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed). This is a setting example.
In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect are "executed" and "not executed". Are assigned to each of them at a decision rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the "execution enabled" of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determination are "first system change effect" and " The "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are each assigned at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 26. In addition, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that acts on the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that acts on the display mode of the active display frame. The target that acts on the second system change effect is different.

In addition, "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution available" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. "Execution Yes" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" indicate that the active display change effect is performed, and the active display change of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as a production. In addition, "no execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

According to FIG. 26, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, Which means that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (loss), it means that the active display change effect is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X are used. Compared to some cases, the rate at which "no execution" is determined is lower. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when a "big hit" occurs in the fluctuation is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when a "loss" occurs in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the expectation of becoming a "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared with the case, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" determined when "execution enabled" is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, when "execution" is determined, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA3-X, when "execution" is determined, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" is determined is about 33% (10/30). Is. Alternatively, more specifically, whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in the ratio at which the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" is determined is that the variation pattern of the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command is the variation pattern PA3-X to PA5-. It is larger than the difference in the ratio at which the "first system change effect" or the "second system change effect" is determined depending on which of the X and the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, the rate at which "first system change effect and second system change effect" are determined when the variation pattern PB3-X is used, and "first system change effect and second system change effect" when the variation pattern PA3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which "directing" is determined is 30% (40% -10%), whereas the ratio at which "first system change directing" is determined and the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern PB3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which the "first system change effect" is determined when PA3-X is 5% (15% -10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the expectation of becoming a "big hit" is higher than when it is not.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X and PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which "no execution" is determined is lower. That is, the ratio of the active display change effect being executed when the super reach is reached in the fluctuation is higher than the ratio of the active display change effect being executed when the normal reach is achieved in the fluctuation. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of becoming a super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the expectation of becoming a super reach is higher than when it is not.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect, and the variation pattern specification command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (the variable display), and when executing the active display change effect, the effect mode of a plurality of active display change effects. Of these, it is decided which active display change effect is to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined that the active display change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed. And any of the second system change effect "may be determined.

Next, a process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed in the case of the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect will be described.
FIG. 27A is a diagram showing an example of setting a determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 27C shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the setting example.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern 1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA2-X is any of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents any of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 is the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4 shown in FIG. Represents any of -3 and PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect pattern as the effect mode of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores an active display change effect pattern as an effect mode of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores 12 types of first system change effects and active display change effect patterns as effect modes of the second system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an action effect that arouses a change in the display mode of the active display for the active display, and is, for example, an action effect that arouses a change in the display shape of the active display.
In FIG. 27 (A), in the active display change effect pattern "BP1", assuming that the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is "sphere" by default, the display shape of the active display is "sphere". This is a production pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that does not change as it is. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP2" is a successful effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "triangle". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP3" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "pentagon". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit" (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which is "missing". It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP4" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "star". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern becomes a "big hit" (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB5-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA5-1) which becomes a "loss".

The second system change effect is an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, and is, for example, an action effect that incites a change in the line thickness of the active display frame.
In FIG. 27B, assuming that the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is "normal" by default, the active display change effect pattern "CP1" is the active display frame. This is a production pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that does not change the line thickness of the line as "normal". According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "CP2" is an effect pattern of a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from "normal" to "medium thickness". According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

Further, the active display change effect pattern "CP3" is an effect pattern of a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from "normal" to "extremely thick". According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit" (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which is "missing". It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect are the action effect that incites the change in the display mode of the active display by the above-mentioned first system change effect, and the active display that surrounds the active display by the above-mentioned second system change effect. It is an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the frame and an action effect that performs both.
In FIG. 27C, in the active display change effect pattern “AP1”, by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is “sphere”, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Assuming that is "normal", the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame remains "normal", which is a failure effect (active display change effect). It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP2" succeeds in changing the display shape of the active display from "normal" to "medium thickness" while keeping the display shape of the active display as "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP3" is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from "normal" to "extremely thick". It is a production pattern of. When the fluctuation pattern becomes a "big hit" (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which becomes a "loss". Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern "AP4" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal", and the active display change. The effect pattern "AP5" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect pattern "AP5" is used. "AP6" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "AP7" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to a "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP8" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect is produced. The pattern "AP9" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "AP10" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP11" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect is produced. The pattern "AP12" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 has the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern (the variable display) of the variation (the variable display) specified by the variation pattern designation command. The active display change effect pattern is determined as the effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

Next, a process of determining the timing for executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect.
It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a plurality (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timing of the first system change effect. And.
The timing 1 is, for example, the timing to execute the first system change effect at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation, the timing 2 is the timing to execute the first system change effect at the time of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the timing 3 is. , It is the timing to execute the first system change effect when the reach is established in the fluctuation, and the timing 4 is the timing to execute the first system change effect after the reach is established (during reach) in the fluctuation. The pseudo-continuous fluctuation is, for example, when the variable display during fluctuation is temporarily stopped.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified into "success expectation degree" small "" indicate that the expectation degree for executing the success effect is "small", and "success expectation degree" medium "". The fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into "" are "medium" in which the expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the above-mentioned success expectation "small". Represents. In addition, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified into "success expectation degree" large "" indicate that the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is "large", which is higher than the success expectation degree "medium". In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified as "success expectation" maximum "", the expectation that the success effect is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation "large". Represents a higher "maximum".

Specifically, in FIG. 27, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are the active display change effect pattern BP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the active display which is the failure effect of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. It is high, and the success expectation that the success production can be executed is low, and it is classified into "success expectation" small "" as described above.

Further, in FIG. 27, fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. In PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4, which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3, which are successful effects of the second system change effect, and The ratio determined for the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. , The degree of success expectation that the success effect can be executed is higher than that of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 27 raises the expectation that the success effect can be executed.

In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the fluctuation patterns PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2.
According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "big hit", the determination ratio determined at the later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern of "loss". .. Further, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of successful production is higher than before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). Further, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of success effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 1). There is.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 has the random value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the variation of the variation (the variable display) specified by the variation pattern designation command. The pattern (variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

At timing 2, immediately after the start of the revariable display, for example, at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display, depending on the number of temporary stops of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be after the reach is established. For example, the execution timing is set so as to set the timing 2 at the time of pseudo-continuous fluctuation after the timing 3 at the time of establishment of reach in FIG. 28. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as execution timings of the first system change effect.

Further, an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. 28. The ROM 121 may be stored as one table in association with the above.
The execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are the same.

The example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect (not shown) is the example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect as shown in FIG. 28. It may be the same, or it may be an example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, which is different from the example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect. Good.

When it is determined in FIG. 26 to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect", the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. Using an example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing, or the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be executed. It may be decided collectively so that the execution timings of the two system change effects may be different from each other. Further, when it is determined in FIG. 26 to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect", the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately by using an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table.

Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, and when the active display change effect is executed, the active display change effect. The effect pattern of the effect and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the effect control pattern, and also sets the effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as an effect control pattern. If a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the variation patterns specified by the variation pattern specification command are prepared, one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (step S532) is completed.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

On the side of the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 updates the first hold storage number when the first start condition is satisfied, and the CPU 103 updates the first hold storage number when the second start condition is satisfied. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a variable category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the like (step S403, step S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result which is the determination result, the reserved storage number updated in step S215, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 (step S412). .. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets the transmission of the variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (step S413), and executes the command control process (step S17). As a result, the fluctuation category command for designating the fluctuation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Further, on the side of the main board 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the variation category extracted in step S217 in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Without using the random value MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the newly extracted numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets the transmission of the variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes the command control process (step S17). As a result, a variation pattern designation command or the like for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL or the second start in the hold effect determination process (step S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the winning memory display area 5HR is additionally displayed is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 transfers the determined content of the hold effect determination process (for example, display mode at the time of addition) to the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading advance notice buffer based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process. While storing (step S161), the hold display is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL or the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (step S162).

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading advance notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, the main The effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the board 11.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 29A (A) and (e) of FIG. 29B (A) show scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29 (B) and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 29A (A) and 29B (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (variable (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 29A (B) and 29B (B) represent a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 29A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.
Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, in the lower center of the image display device 5. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and in addition to the active display AH, a predetermined range including an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and an active display frame AHW is included. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA such as the active display AH itself or the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 29A (A), it is held and displayed in the buffer number "1" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to, and the first pre-reading notice is given. In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C is the display mode of the hold display H2 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2 (display mode "white" at the time of addition). ) Is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H3 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3 (at the time of addition). It is assumed that the display mode "white") is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At the time of making the effect control, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.
From the scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first hold storage number to "4". (Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a variable category (step S217), and determines a special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S403, step S404).

For example, it is assumed that "missing" is determined as the result of displaying the special figure. The CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" from the plurality of variable category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result "loss" and the number of reserved storages "4" (FIG. 16). ), The variable category is determined based on the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the variable category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit))" is determined. The CPU 103 mainly sets the transmission of the variable category command that specifies the variable category "PB5" (step S413), and specifies the variable category "PB5" by executing the command control process (step S17). It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variable category command for designating the variable category from the main board 11 uses the hold display mode from among the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variable category. A decision table is selected, and a hold display display mode (at the time of addition) to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the display mode MR6 for determining the hold display. Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start prize. Store the content (display mode at the time of addition).

In the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (c) shows the case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28) in the scene of FIG. 29A (b). This is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters "extreme heat" are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B) are also the same as (c) of FIGS. 29A (A) to 29A (A).
That is, the second system change from (b) in FIG. 29A (A) to (c) in FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 29A (B) to (c) in FIG. 29A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is "extremely thick". The display mode of is changing.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the arrow Y2 disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), so that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW became thicker. The display mode of "normal" has not changed.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 30A (A) and 30B (A) show the success effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 27 (A). It is assumed that (changed (shape "star")) is set. 30A (B) and 30B (B) show the failure effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. 27 (A). It is assumed that nothing (shape "sphere")) is set.

FIG. 30A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 30A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At the time of making the effect control, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the first system change effect. The scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, the timing 1 of FIG. 28). In FIG. 30A (b), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

Then, in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene in which the triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (c) of FIG. Of the stars Z1 and the pentagons Z3 that make up the group Y1, the pentagons Z3 have disappeared and only the stars Z1 continue to move. (A) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B) are also the same as (a) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A).
That is, the first system change changes from (b) in FIG. 30A (A) to (d) in FIG. 30A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 30A (B) to (d) in FIG. 30A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 is further moved toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining in the figure group Y1 without disappearing collides with the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the active display AH is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is changed to "star".
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (B) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 moves further toward the lower part, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining in the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1 disappeared without colliding with the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B). The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as it is "sphere".
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31 (B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 31A (A) and 31B (A) show successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27 (C) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness "extremely thick"), changed (shape "star")) is set. 31A (B) and 31B (B) show the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 27 (C) as an effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape "sphere"), no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 31A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 31A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 31A (c), the first system change effect and the second system change effect are shown immediately after the variable display is started in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). Is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as the figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change. As an effect, an arrow Y2 on which the characters "extreme heat" are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.
(A) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B) are also the same as (c) of FIGS. 31A (A) to 31A (A).
That is, the first systematic change from (b) in FIG. 31A (A) to (c) in FIG. 31A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 31A (B) to (c) in FIG. 31A (B) It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production and the second system change production.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. Further, a scene in which the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. Is.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW becomes ". It has changed as a display mode of "extremely thick". Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A). , Of the stars Z1 and the pentagons Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagons Z3 have disappeared, and only the star Z1 continues to move.

Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 30A (A) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 is further moved toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH.
In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining in the figure group Y1 without disappearing collides with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the active display AH is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is changed to "star".
Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (B). , Of the stars Z1 and the pentagons Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B) It is a scene in which the image display device 5 moves further toward the lower part, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining in the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1 disappeared without colliding with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B). The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as it is "sphere". Further, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 32A (A) and 32B (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (variable (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 32A (B) and 32B (B) represent a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 32A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 32A (A), it is held and displayed in the buffer number "1" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first pre-reading notice. In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C is the display mode of the hold display H2 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2 (display mode "white" at the time of addition). ) Is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H3 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3 (at the time of addition). It is assumed that the display mode "white") is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.
From the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first hold storage number to "4". (Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining a variable category (step S217), and determines a special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S403, step S404).

For example, it is assumed that "missing" is determined as the result of displaying the special figure. The CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" from the plurality of variable category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result "loss" and the number of reserved storages "4" (FIG. 16). ), The variable category is determined based on the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the variable category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit))" is determined. The CPU 103 mainly sets the transmission of the variable category command that specifies the variable category "PB5" (step S413), and specifies the variable category "PB5" by executing the command control process (step S17). It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variable category command for designating the variable category from the main board 11 uses the hold display mode from among the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variable category. A decision table is selected, and a hold display display mode (at the time of addition) to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the display mode MR6 for determining the hold display. Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start prize. Store the content (display mode at the time of addition).

In the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 32A (c), the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), and the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol display area 5R of the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode.
The scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the second system change effect is executed after the reach is established (for example, the timing 3 of FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters "extreme heat" are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
(A) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B) are also the same as (a) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A).
That is, the second system change from (b) in FIG. 32A (A) to (d) in FIG. 32A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 32A (B) to (d) in FIG. 32A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is "extremely thick". The display mode of is changing.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (B), the arrow Y2 disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), so that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW became thicker. The display mode of "normal" has not changed.
Similarly, for the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. Further, in the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 33B are time-series arrangements of the scenes in the image display device 5. In addition, in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, FIGS. 33A and 33B show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B are different in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are the reach modes after the variable display is started in the scene (b) in FIG. 32A (A). This is a scene in which the display is stopped in a different display mode.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (e) of FIG. 33A. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 33A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.

In FIG. 33B (g), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
(A) of FIG. 33A to (g) of FIG. 33B are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene that is colliding with.
In the scene (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick". ing. Further, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the "extremely thick" display mode, the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) of FIG. 34B are time-series arrangements of the scenes in the image display device 5. In addition, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 34A and 34B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B are different in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 34A (c), the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 34A (b), and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R reach. It is a scene that is stopped and displayed in the mode.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (e) of FIG. 34A. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 34A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.

Further, in FIG. 34A (f), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
Here, (a) of FIG. 34A to (f) of FIG. 34A are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick". , The decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 34B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the display mode of "extremely thick", the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed. Is in the reach mode, the chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene (j) of FIG. 34B, the chance symbol is displayed without temporarily stopping in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The decorative symbol in the area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIGS. 35A (a) to (f) and FIGS. 35B (g) to (i) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 35A and 35B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B differ in the timing of reaching establishment. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 35A (c), the arrow Y2 in which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative pattern display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (g) of FIG. 35B. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 35B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo-continuous variation is completed, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIGS. 36A (a) to (f) and FIGS. 36B (g) to (i) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 36A and 36B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B differ in the timing of reaching establishment. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 36A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image (a special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

FIG. 36A shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “super heat” are drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene colliding with the active display frame AHW.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative pattern display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative design and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed in the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (g) of FIG. 36B. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 36B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo-continuous variation is completed, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, examples of scenes in which the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach mode are shown in FIGS. 36A (e) and 36B (i). However, as in FIGS. 36A and 36B, when a pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing in FIG. 36B (i). That is, the establishment of reach in FIGS. 36A and 36B means that the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous variation is completed. It is the scene of i).

In FIGS. 29 to 36, the success effect can be executed depending on the timing at which the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect, and second system change effect) is executed. If the degree of expectation is different, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the fluctuation, the active display change effect is executed at the second timing. It shows that there is a high degree of expectation that a successful production in the active display change production can be executed.

(Modification example)
The display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit as shown in FIG. 24, and is different from the normal mode, which is the normal (default, initial color) display mode, and the normal mode. A special aspect and a first special aspect and a second special aspect which are different from the normal aspect and the special aspect may be included. It will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38 and 39.

For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variable category. FIG. 37 (A) shows a hold display mode selected when the variable category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” or the variable category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table (H-TBL1). FIG. 37 (B) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss)”) among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37 (C) shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA4 (super reach α (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. An example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 37 (D) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA5 (super reach β (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. (H-TBL4). FIG. 37 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” is selected among the above seven types. FIG. 37 (F) is an example of setting the determination ratio of the mode (H-TBL5). FIG. 37 (F) is a hold selected when the variable category “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” is selected among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL6) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. FIG. 37 (G) shows the variable category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL7) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when.

Comparing FIG. 37 and FIG. 24, it is different that a part of the determination ratio to “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 37. Specifically, the determination ratio of "white" in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 between the determination ratio of "white" and the determination ratio of "gray" in each hold display mode determination table of FIG. 37. This is a setting example to which the decision ratio is assigned. In this setting example, "white" is a display mode (normal mode) of the normal hold display, and "gray" is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same expectation for the jackpot as the normal mode, but when the "gray" hold display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode indicating that it is high.

Further, in the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the aspect and the special aspect, yellow, which is the second special aspect in which the expectation for the jackpot is different (for example, the expectation for the jackpot is higher than the first special aspect), and unlike the normal aspect and the special aspect, the expectation for the jackpot is different. It may also include red, which is a third special aspect having different expectations (for example, a higher expectation for a big hit than the second special aspect).

For example, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the decision table, and is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed may be determined.

Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the decision content of the first hold effect determination process based on the decision result of the first hold effect determination process (step). S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to correspond to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C.

Then, after executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first in the first start winning command buffer 194A). A new hold display is added to the first start prize storage display area 5HL based on the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the start prize. The first hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect is produced. The hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL.

Then, in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, when the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, or when executing the active display change effect, which The process of determining whether to execute the active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed in the case of the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, and the change. A process of determining the timing for executing the active display change effect, a process of setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and a process of determining which active display change effect to be executed when executing the active display change effect will be described. To do. When the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 is used, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. .. Here, the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 are active corresponding to the fluctuation. The difference is that a setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table is referred to depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is a special mode.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38A is an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is not the special mode (gray). 38 (B) is an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is the special mode (gray).
Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) shows whether or not to execute the active display change effect and when the active display change effect is executed, as in the setting example shown in FIG. 26. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the active display change effect.
Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to "with execution" and "without execution" at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), respectively. Further, in the "execution enabled" of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence / absence is "first system". Decisions as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) for "change effect", "second system change effect", and "first system change effect and second system change effect", respectively. Allotted as a percentage.

In addition, "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution available" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. "Execution Yes" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" indicate that the active display change effect is performed, and the active display change of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as a production. In addition, "no execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

According to FIG. 38, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, Which means that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. In addition, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of "execution enabled" in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B)), when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ), The rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that of the second system change effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that when the variation pattern is "miss". In addition, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the ratio of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect being executed is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the fluctuation pattern is "loss".

Further, the determination rate of whether or not the active display change effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is in a special mode, and if the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is in a special mode, the fluctuation The rate of determination that the active display change effect is executed is higher than that in the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode.
Further, there are cases where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, cases where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38 (A) is taken into consideration, and the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is not a special mode, and cases where the active display corresponds to the fluctuation is not a special mode (B). In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38 and comparing the case where the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is the special mode and each of the cases, the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 (A) is compared. , The decision rate of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the decision rate of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. ing.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect, and the variation pattern specification command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (the variable display), and when executing the active display change effect, the effect mode of a plurality of active display change effects. Of these, it is decided which active display change effect is to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined that the active display change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed. And any of the second system change effect "may be determined.

The figure group Y1 to be displayed as the first system change effect may be determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures constituting the figure group Y1. It will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect.
In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, in the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect, for example, 10 types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to the combination of three figures of triangle, pentagram, and star are displayed. ~ SHP10 is included. This first system detailed pattern includes a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27 (A)) and the first system change effect. It is referred to when both the second system change effect and the second system change effect are executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27 (C) is determined).

In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 39. Assigned.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the first system detailed pattern as the effect mode of the first system change effect of 10 types corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG. 27.

In FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is high. Compared with the case of hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination rate determined for the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher. Further, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the details of the first system which can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined fluctuation. The pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a pentagon, a triangle, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP3" is a figure. This is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP4", the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, triangles, and triangles, and is the first system. The detailed pattern "SHP6" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP7" constitutes the figure group Y1. This is an effect pattern when one figure is composed of stars, pentagons, and pentagons. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP8", the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, triangles, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, and pentagons, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP10". Is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars.
According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the figures constituting the figure group Y1.

In addition, when considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the above-mentioned common effect is performed. , It may be executed as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect, or a suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect). A suggestion effect that suggests a common effect that is commonly executed with the effect) may be executed in the same or different manners.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when the special mode is considered, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is the special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect that is executed in the same or different manner as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

In addition, in FIG. 39, among the figure group Y1 composed of the initial display (combination), the figure to be erased in the common effect may be deleted from the figure having the display mode of the active display having a low expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, the display mode after the success effect is executed among the figure group composed of three figures of "star", "pentagon", and "triangle". Of the two figures other than the figure (eg, "pentagon"), the figure with the lowest expectation (eg, "triangle") is erased first, and then the figure with the lowest expectation (eg, "star") is erased. If it is a failure effect, the order of "triangle", "pentagon", and "star" is in the group of figures consisting of "star", "pentagon", and "triangle". You may want to erase it.

As described above, the game machine 1 according to the above embodiment has a variable display (for example, a special figure) after the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) provided in the game area. Variable display of identification information is executed based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, etc., and display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol, etc. 1 etc.), and the variable display in which the game medium has passed through the start area is the hold storage means (1) for storing the hold information up to a predetermined upper limit for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied. For example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the first start winning command buffer 194A, the second start winning command buffer 194B, etc.) are stored in the hold storage means. Hold display means for performing hold display in a predetermined display mode for each of the hold information (for example, a process of adding hold display to the first start winning memory display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of step S162, or In the second hold addition process of step S165, the process of adding the hold display to the second start winning memory display area 5HR) and the hold display corresponding to the variable display are set based on the establishment of the variable display start condition. A special image showing information including the corresponding digestion display (for example, an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA, or an active display corresponding to the variable display. A predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, for example, a special image representing the information) is provided. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display area AH is displayed. In addition to the display AH, the special image display means for displaying in the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, the area including the active display frame AHW, and the like, and the variable display of the identification information are being executed. A common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display. And the second system change In the conversion effect, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display and the success effect of changing the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect (for example, the first system change effect). In the active display, the figure of any shape "star" of the figure group Y1 collides with the display mode of the star to change the display mode of the star, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and is active. An effect that changes the line thickness of the display frame, or an effect that changes the display mode such as the active display or the active display frame by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect) or the above. Failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image (For example, in the first system change effect, the display mode of the active display disappears before the figure of any shape "star" of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display. In the production that does not change or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, or the first system change of these. It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing both an effect and a second system change effect to perform active display or an effect that does not change one or both display modes of the active display frame), and variable display of identification information. Of the plurality of timings during the execution of, the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on which timing the common effect is executed, and the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the identification information is started. A re-variable display means for executing a re-variable display that causes the identification information to be variably displayed again after the temporary stop is provided, and at least the variable display of the identification information including the timing before and after the temporary stop is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on which timing the common effect is executed among the plurality of timings.

According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that encourages whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made to. In addition, the game machine can improve the expectation of the player by paying attention to the execution timing.

Further, in the game machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode forming a part of the specific display result is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the game machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after the reach is established).

Further, in the game machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display than when the common effect is executed at the first timing of the variable display of the identification information being executed. When it is executed, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information during execution.

Further, in the game machine 1, the special figure display result and the hold storage are stored in the predetermining means (for example, in the process of step S412 by the CPU 103) for determining whether or not the specific display result is to be obtained before the variable display display result is derived and displayed. The variable category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the number, and the variable category is selected based on the selected variable category determination table and the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. In the process of determining the winning random value at the time of winning in step S220, the process of determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type, etc.) and the process of determining the predetermining means, which is stored in the reserved storage means. A specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the reserved information is the specific display result (for example, the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol in the special symbol normal processing in step S110 is "big hit". Or, a process of determining whether or not to make a "small hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed) and a plurality of types of hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means. An effect executing means capable of executing a hold notice effect to be displayed in any of the display modes, and a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. The effect executing means displays the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the judgment target of the specific determination means in the first special mode or the second special mode at a different ratio according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. In addition, the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings and displayed, and the suggestion effect executing means can display the hold display in the special mode. When displayed with, the suggestion effect may be executed more frequently than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. You may.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution ratio of executing the above-mentioned common effect as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect may be different. , Suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display after the hold display is displayed in a special mode (for example, suggestion suggesting a common effect that is commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect). The execution rate of executing the effect) in the same or different manners may be different.
In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is a special mode, the active display change effect is applied to the hold display displayed in the special mode. The execution rate of executing the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect modes may be different.

In the above explanation, the main advance notice effect such as the active display change effect has been described, but if it does not affect this main advance notice effect, other advance notice effects such as the main advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect are executed with the same fluctuation. If it does not affect other notice effects such as the main notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect, the main notice effect may be executed with the same variation. Here, when it does not affect, when a plurality of advance notice effects (main advance notice effect, pre-reading advance notice effect) are executed in the change, the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change. This is the case, or when a plurality of advance notice effects (main advance notice effect, pre-reading advance notice effect) are executed in the fluctuation, it is not difficult for the player to see due to the effect mode of each advance notice effect.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. For example, a character having a hammer appears as a hold effect for the hold display, and the action effect of hitting the first hold display with a hammer is executed. It is a decorative design when it is an effect mode that changes the display mode of the hold display, or when the decorative design is composed of eight types of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image in total of nine types. It may be an effect mode in which the character pops out from the character image and the action effect is executed on the hold display of the target.

In the above description, the display mode when the hold display is added has been described, but when it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the addition display mode and the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example based on the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIGS. 24 and 37, and the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next variation.

In the above description, as the first system change effect, the display mode of the active display is changed by an image group composed of a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame is displayed by an arrow. Although the effect mode for changing the above is described, it does not have to be a figure or an arrow. For example, it is an effect mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame. May be good.

In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described, but it is similar to the setting example using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. 24 and 37. The display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in, for example, four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the display modes of the above three colors or less or six or more colors, or the colors of the hold display or the hold display are drawn. The display mode of the hold display may be determined so that it is additionally displayed by characters or symbols, or the hold display may be additionally displayed by the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character shape, etc.). The display mode may be determined, or the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed depending on the movement of the hold display (for example, the operation pattern of the character in the character type hold display).

In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or the active display may be deleted when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

In the above description, after performing a common effect on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, a display mode of a special image representing information including an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. An example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of a special image representing information including an active display corresponding to a hold display corresponding to the variable display and a success effect that changes the variable display has been described. The display mode of the success effect or hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display after executing the common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold displays displayed in You may execute a failure effect that does not change.

Further, after performing a success effect or a failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is supported. Further, a success effect or a failure effect may be executed on the special image representing the information including the active display.
In this case, for example, when there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 and step 163 in FIG. 23, each of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, the success / failure effect for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variable category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display is further determined. As shown in FIG. 10, the success / failure effect, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. for the special image representing the information including the active display when becomes are determined according to the variable category and the like. The determined contents may be stored in the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D.

In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 on which the character "super heat" is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn on the arrow Y2, and other Characters may be drawn, characters and the like may be drawn. Further, when there are a plurality of types of effect modes as the second system change effect, the success effect is determined by which of the plurality of types of second system change effect is selected. Expectations to be executed may be different. In addition, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests a display mode of a special image after the successful effect is executed, depending on the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, the control of the lamp 9 will be described. As described above, the lamp 9 can emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a plurality of types of light emission patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can control the lamp 9 to emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern when control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 122. There is.

Further, the control data set in the control data area is data for the lamp control board 14 to control light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.). Specifically, an identifier for uniquely identifying them is assigned to each light emission pattern, and the control data described above is data indicating this identifier. When the control data is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 reads the control data and outputs the control data to the lamp control board 14. The lamp control board 14 is driven to turn on / off the lamp 9 by controlling a lamp driver circuit or the like so as to emit light in a light emission pattern identified by an identifier indicated by control data. On the other hand, when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set in the control data area. Further, the timing at which the control data is set is a timing before the timing at which the control is started by the control data or the timing at which the control is started by the control data. In the following description, when the effect of any of the lamps 9 is described, it may be simply expressed as a lamp effect.

FIG. 40A is a diagram showing an example of a control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. Then, each layer corresponds to a sound effect that outputs sound. For example, the "error" effect is an effect in which a screen indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, but it corresponds to an effect of outputting an error sound. The sound effect includes an effect that does not produce sound (silence effect), and there may be a lamp effect corresponding to this silence effect. The lamp effect corresponding to this silent effect is an effect of making the lamp emit light instead of turning it off.

Further, the priority order is set for layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5, and the order of priority is layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5. Here, "priority is set" means that, specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9, it is controlled in the order of layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. In order to control whether or not the data for use is set and output the control data set in the control data area determined to be set to the lamp control board 14, the layer 5 is used. It shows that priority is given in the order of layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. The example of realizing the priority setting is not limited to this, and for example, a value indicating the priority may be assigned to each layer. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the values assigned to all the layers in which the control data is set, and the layer to which the highest priority value (for example, the maximum value) is assigned among them. The control data set in is output to the lamp control board 14.

In this way, since the priority is set for the layers, only one lamp effect is performed in the lamp effect, and a plurality of lamp effects are not performed at the same time, but the sound effects corresponding to the lamp effects are simultaneously performed. May be done. For example, when the control data of the BGM effect is set in the control data area of the layer 1, and the control data of another effect is not set in the control data area of the layer having a higher priority than the layer 1, the BGM BGM is performed as a sound production along with the lamp production of the production. In this state, for example, if the control data of another effect is set in the control data area of the layer 3, in the lamp effect, the lamp effect of the BGM effect ends and the lamp effect of the other effect is performed. In the sound production, the BGM and the sound production of other productions are performed at the same time.

When the control data is set in one of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits (lights, lights, lights) the lamp 9 in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. Control to blink). Specifically, for example, when the gaming state is a low base state, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when control data is set in layer 1, the BGM effect of layer 1 (normal variation, reach variation). ) Is used to control the lamp 9 to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). When the control data is set in the layer 2, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of the layer 2. When control data is set in the layer 3, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of the layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, in the high base state of the game state, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the control data is set in the layer 1, the light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal fluctuation) of the layer 1 is set. The lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). When control data is set in layer 2, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach fluctuation) of layer 2. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the advance notice effect (all) of the layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, when the game state is the big hit state, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the control data is set in the layer 1, the light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of the layer 1 is used. The lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the layer 2, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice effect (holding sequence, promotion) of the layer 2. .. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the large winning opening winning effect of the layer 3. When control data is set in the layer 4, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the probability variation winning effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the lamp 9 is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

When the control data is set in both control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits light (lights, blinks) the lamp 9 in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area set with a high priority. Etc.) can be controlled. Specifically, for example, when control data is set in both the control data areas of layer 2 and layer 3, the light emission pattern corresponding to layer 3 which is the control data area in which the priority is set is set high. The lamp 9 can be controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2, the layer 3, and the layer 4, the lamp has a light emitting pattern corresponding to the layer 4 which is the control data area in which the priority is set high. It is possible to control the 9 to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, a light emission pattern when control data is set in one control data area during the first game state and one control during a second game state different from the first game state. The light emission pattern when control data is set in the data area is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the control data area is provided for each gaming state (low base state, high base state, jackpot state). Then, for example, in the low base state, for example, the light emission pattern when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 (light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect) and the high base state different from the low base state, for example The light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 is different.

As a general rule, the setting for the control data area shown in FIG. 40A is reset every time one game is completed. "One game" indicates a game that starts from the start of the variable display and ends by the stop display of the variable display when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, and when the game state is the big hit state. Indicates a game from the start to the end of the jackpot state.

Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is determined for the stop display of the variable display or each effect. It is reset when the time has passed. Even if the timing for which the time specified for each effect has elapsed does not arrive, the variable display is reset when the variable display is stopped.

Further, when the game state is a big hit state, the control data is set by the special figure hit waiting process of S173 or the big hit middle effect process of S176, and the big hit ends, the round ends, or each effect. It is reset when the time specified for each elapses.

Exceptionally, the data for controlling the lamp effect by the lamp 9 corresponding to the effect performed over a plurality of games (for example, the above-mentioned pre-reading notice effect and the effect including a plurality of big hits) is set by the end of the game. It will never be reset. The details of the lamp effect performed over a plurality of games will be described later. It should be noted that, as for the lamp effect performed over a plurality of games, a combination of one game different depending on the above-mentioned game state is made into one game again, and even if the effect over a plurality of the one game is also a lamp effect. Good.

Next, each effect shown in FIG. 40 (A) will be described. As described above, the lamp control in the present embodiment corresponds to the sound effect in each effect shown in FIG. 40 (A). In the following explanation, the lamps that emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in each effect are described, but only the described lamps emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) and other lamps also emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). (Blinking, etc.) may occur.

In FIG. 40 (A), the error effect corresponds to the error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the error image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the error sound output operation from the speaker 8, and the lamp. This is an effect in which an error notification or the like is performed by the error light emission operation or the like in 9. The error effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which all the lamps 9 emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the effect control CPU 120 is in a gaming state when the control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) in which the highest priority is set. It is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern indicating an error effect regardless of the above.

The definite notification effect is an effect in which a V-shaped lamp or a lamp on which a V-shape is drawn blinks, or a V-shaped pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is changing. It is a production (notice) that indicates that the jackpot to be performed is confirmed. Further, the final notification effect is not limited to the V-shape, but includes an effect in which the light emitting member blinks. The definite notification effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the light emitting member 9U blinks.

For the probability variation prize production, for example, a V probability variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the probability variation winning opening (or a predetermined area provided in the probability variation winning opening; hereinafter, the probability variation winning opening, etc.) is won. In, it is a production performed when a prize is won in a probabilistic winning opening or the like. When a prize is won in a probabilistic winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is generally set as a probabilistic state, and when a prize is not won in the probabilistic winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is generally set as a non-probable changing state. In this case, an effect is provided in which the player aims to win a prize in the probability change winning opening or the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability change challenge effect in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a probability variation winning opening, but in order to explain an example of lamp control, the probability variation winning effect in the present embodiment is, for example, in the special variable winning ball device 7. The predetermined area is provided in the above-mentioned area, and when the predetermined area is won, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, in the present embodiment, the probabilistic challenge effect is an effect in which the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). In addition, this probability change winning opening is also called a probability change attacker.

In the present embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in the display area of the image display device 5 while the light emitting members 9CC, 9CR, and 9CL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). The A effect is an effect in which the character A is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the notice B effect is an effect in which the character B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, "notice (all)" indicates the notice A production and the notice B production. In addition, among the "notices (holding reams, promotion)", the notices (holding reams) have a hold that becomes a big hit when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold held before or during the big hit. It is a production that announces that during the big hit. The notice (promotion) is the above-mentioned big hit medium promotion effect, or, for example, the round number promotion effect in which the number of big hit rounds increases from 8 rounds to 16 rounds. This "notice (holding ream, promotion)" is an effect in the display area of the image display device 5 while the light emitting members 9CC, 9CR, and 9CL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

The large winning opening winning effect is an effect performed when a prize is won in the special variable winning ball device 7. The large winning opening winning effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. In this grand prize opening prize production, a production that is particularly conspicuous at the time of so-called over prize may be performed.

In each of the effects described above, not only the effect of the lamp effect but also the effect other than the lamp effect (for example, the sound effect by the sound, the display effect by the image display device 5, or the effect of combining the sound effect and the display effect, etc.) Although it may be performed, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, "effect" shall indicate only the lamp effect in the effect. When indicating the entire production including the lamp production and the production other than the lamp, it is expressed as "production (all)". In addition, when indicating an effect other than a lamp, it is expressed as "effect (other than a lamp)". For example, "BGM effect" indicates only the lamp effect, and "BGM effect (all)" indicates the entire effect including the effect other than the lamp such as the sound effect in addition to the lamp effect, and "BGM effect (other than the lamp)". "" Indicates a production other than a lamp, such as a sound production.

Further, in each of the above-described effects, the priority of the BGM effect is set to be the lowest in any of the gaming states due to the nature of the BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect, because the notice A effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the definite notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect, because the definite notification effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed.

In the high base state, the BGM (reach fluctuation) production has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) production, because the BGM (reach fluctuation) production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (normal) production. Is. In the high base state, the notice (all) production has a higher priority than the BGM (reach fluctuation) production, because the notice (all) production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (reach fluctuation) production. Is. In the high base state, the definite notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, because the definite notification effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice (all) effect.

In the jackpot state, the notice (holding ream, promotion) production has a higher priority than the BGM (big hit) production, but this is a production in which the notice (holding ream, promotion) is more important for the player than the BGM (big hit) production. Because. In the big hit state, the big prize opening prize production has a higher priority than the notice (holding consecutive, promotion) production, but this is because the big winning opening winning production is performed every time a prize is won, and the notice (holding consecutive, promotion) ) The effect (other than the lamp) is generally performed in the display area of the image display device 5 for a relatively longer period of time than the large prize opening prize effect. However, the large prize opening prize effect is announced (holding ream, promotion). If the priority is raised, any effect can be notified to the player, but if the advance notice (holding ream, promotion) effect is given a higher priority than the big prize opening prize effect, the notice (hold) This is because only the production (ream, promotion) is performed, and the grand prize opening prize production is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the large prize opening prize production, the production at the time of over winning is generally performed, and the over winning is a benefit that the player cannot normally obtain, so the importance of the production is important. It is also because it is expensive.

The setting of the control data for each effect is reset when the time specified for each effect elapses, except for the BGM effect and the control data for the effect performed across the plurality of games. In addition, as an effect (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine, there is an effect (all) that branches into two or more effects (all). For example, the effect (all) shown in FIG. 29B is divided into an effect that changes the display mode of the special image (all) and an effect that does not change (all), such as "extremely thick". In addition, the confrontation production is also a general production (all), and in this case, it is divided into a winning production (all) and a defeating production (all). When branching to a plurality of such effects (all), the control data of the corresponding effect is reset when branching.

In the following FIG. 40 (B), in one gaming state, the first control data is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the second control data, and the gaming state is different from the one gaming state. 1 is a diagram showing an example in which the first control data is set in a control data area having a lower priority than the second control data.

Specifically, it is assumed that the control data is set in the control data area as shown in FIG. 40 (A) during the low base state, and as shown in FIG. 40 (B) during the high base state. It is assumed that control data is set in the control data area.

At this time, in the low base state, the control data for the notice A effect (set in layer 3) is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the control data for the notice B effect (set in layer 2). ing. Then, in the high base state, the control data for the notice A effect (set in layer 2) is set in the control data area having a lower priority than the control data for the notice B effect (set in layer 3). There is. That is, the priority order is reversed depending on the game state.

In this way, the advance notice can be executed in order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The control data set in each of the control data areas described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 40, and is appropriately set according to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine or the like.

FIG. 41 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 41, in a state where the game state is a low base state, variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and time T2. The time chart is shown when the notice B effect is generated and the notice A effect is generated at time T3. The BGM effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T2 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T3 to the end. It has been. As an example, the control target lamp is a light emitting member 9CC.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 41, the vertical axis shows the lamp control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, in FIG. 41, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the definite notification effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as the control data of the notice A effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the notice B effect. , The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect.

The light emitting member 9CC emits light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the error effect, emits light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the final notification effect, and emits light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice A effect. However, in the notice B effect, the color D emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.), and in the BGM effect, the color E emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 41, a display mode showing the emission color and the like of the light emitting member 9CC is shown. In this display mode, "turn off" indicates that the light emitting member 9CC is turned off, and the alphabet indicates that the light emitting member 9CC is emitting light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the corresponding color. "Erase" and alphabetical expressions are also used in other time charts described below.

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 41, whether or not the effect (other than the lamp) corresponding to each layer is executed is indicated by a solid line (execution) and a broken line (stopped). For example, since the BGM effect (all) is an effect of executing the sound effect together with the lamp effect, the sound effect can be executed even when the priority is low and the lamp effect is not executed. The meanings of the solid line and the broken line are used interchangeably in other time charts.

Further, in the case of FIG. 41, each effect (other than the lamp) can be executed at the same time. For example, the notice A effect (other than the lamp) and the notice B effect (other than the lamp) can be executed at the same time.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 41 will be described. First, since the control data is not set in each control data area, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

There is a start prize at time T1, and the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, so that the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1, so that the notice B lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 2, so that the notice A lamp control is turned on and the notice B lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color C as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 41, the notice B effect, which is important for the player, is prioritized over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect, which is important for the player, is prioritized over the notice B effect. Since the visual effect can be appropriately given, the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 42, in a state where the game state is a high base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and time T2. The time chart when the reach occurs at the time T3 and the fluctuation display ends at the time T3 is shown. The normal variation effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to T2, and the reach variation effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T2 to T3. As an example, the control target lamp is a light emitting member 9CC.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 42, the vertical axis shows the effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, FIG. 42 shows control data set in the control data areas of layers 1 and 2, and layers 3, 4, and 5 are omitted. Then, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data for the reach variation effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is used as the control data for the normal variation effect. ..

The light emitting member 9CC emits light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the reach variation effect, and emits light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the normal variation effect.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 42 will be described. First, since the control data is not set in each control data area, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

In this state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, so that the normal fluctuation lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, the reach fluctuation lamp control is turned on and the normal fluctuation lamp control is turned off by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T3, when the fluctuation display is stopped, the reach fluctuation effect is also finished, and the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the reach fluctuation lamp control is turned off. Become. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 42, since the reach variation effect, which is important for the player, is prioritized over the normal variation effect, it is possible to appropriately give the player the visual effect of each lamp effect, and thus the interest of the game. Can be improved.

FIG. 43 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, when the game state is in the high base state and the variable display is performed, the notice B effect occurs at time T1, the notice B effect ends at time T2, and the notice B effect ends at time T3. A time chart is shown when the A effect occurs, the notice A effect ends at time T4, the final notification effect occurs at time T5, and the final notification effect ends at time T6. The BGM effect (other than the lamp) is performed from the beginning to the end, the notice B effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T3 to the end, and is confirmed. The notification effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T5 to T6. As an example, the control target lamp is a light emitting member 9CC.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, the vertical axis shows the effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, in FIG. 43, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the definite notification effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as the control data of the notice B effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the notice A effect. , The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect. This is a reversal of the priorities of the notice A effect and the notice B effect shown in FIG. 40 (B).

The light emitting member 9CC emits light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the error effect, emits light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the final notification effect, and emits light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice B effect. However, in the notice A production, the color D emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.), and in the BGM production, the color E emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in the case of FIG. 43, each effect (other than the lamp) can be executed at the same time. For example, the notice A effect (other than the lamp) and the notice B effect (other than the lamp) can be executed at the same time. Note that the notice A effect (other than the lamp) and the notice B effect (other than the lamp) are executed to the end when the execution is started, but may end in the middle.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 43 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

In this state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 1, so that the notice B lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color C as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 3 is reset, so that the notice B lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1, so that the notice A lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T4, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the notice A lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T5, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 4, which has a higher priority than layer 1, so that the definite notification lamp control is turned on and the BGM lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T6, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 4 is reset, so that the confirmation notification lamp control is turned off and the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 43, the notice B effect and the notice A effect, which are important for the player, are prioritized over the BGM effect, and the definite notification effect, which is more important than the notice B effect and the notice A effect, is prioritized. , Since it is possible to appropriately give the player the visual effect of each lamp effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the probabilistic challenge effect occurs at time T1 while the game state is a big hit state and the BGM effect is being performed, and during the probabilistic challenge effect, the big prize opening prize is won at time T2. The production occurs, the big prize opening prize production ends at time T3, the probabilistic challenge production ends at time T4, the big winning mouth winning production occurs at time T5, the probability variation winning production occurs at time T5, and the probability variation winning production occurs, time T6 Shows the time chart when the probabilistic winning effect is completed. The BGM production (other than the lamp) is performed from the beginning to the end, the probability variation challenge production (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to T4, and the probability variation prize production (other than the lamp) is performed from time T5 to T6. During that time, the big prize opening production (other than the lamp) is performed every time the big winning opening is won. As an example, the control target lamps are light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR installed at the left and right positions of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the vertical axis shows the effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, in FIG. 44, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the probability variation winning effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as the data, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the large winning opening winning effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used for controlling the probability change challenge effect. The data is used, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect.

The light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the error effect, emit light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the probabilistic winning effect, and emit light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the big winning opening winning effect. , Blinking, etc.), and in the probabilistic challenge effect, it emits light in color D (lighting, blinking, etc.), and in the BGM effect, it emits light in color E (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in the case of FIG. 44, an effect other than the lamp effect included in the BGM effect and an effect other than the lamp effect included in the probabilistic challenge effect can be executed at the same time. An effect other than the lamp effect included in the BGM effect and an effect other than the lamp effect included in the probabilistic winning effect can be executed at the same time.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 44 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

In the case of FIG. 44, since it is a big hit state, a prize is generated to the special variable winning ball device 7 at any time. Each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are colored C as the big winning opening winning effect, unless the control data is set in the control data area of the layer larger than the layer 3. Lights up (lights, blinks, etc.).

In such a state, the probability variation challenge lamp control is turned on by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1 at the time T1. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 3, which has a higher priority than layer 2, so that the large winning opening winning lamp control is turned on and the probability variation challenge lamp control is turned off. .. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T3, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 3 is reset, so that the large winning opening winning lamp control is turned off and the probability variation challenge lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color D as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T4, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the probability variation challenge lamp control is turned off, but the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. Therefore, by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 3, the large winning opening winning lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C as shown in the lamp display mode. It is assumed that a prize is won in the probability change winning opening in this probability change challenge.

Next, at time T5, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 4, which has a higher priority than layer 1 and layer 3, so that the probability variation winning lamp control is turned on, and the BGM lamp control and the large winning opening The winning lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color B as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T6, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 4 is reset, so that the probability variation winning lamp control is turned off, but the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. Therefore, by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 3, the large winning opening winning lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C as shown in the lamp display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 44, it is possible to achieve both the visual effect of the probabilistic challenge effect and the large winning opening winning effect, and the probabilistic winning effect that is important for the player is prioritized over the large winning opening winning effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give the player the visual effect of each lamp effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the embodiment described above, one control data is set in the control data area of one layer, but an embodiment in which a plurality of different control data are set will be described.

When there is one control data set in the control data area of one layer, the maximum number of control data that can be set is the number of layers, and the effect pattern is limited. Therefore, in order to diversify the effect. In this embodiment, a plurality of control data can be set in the control data area of one layer.

In this case, since one control data area is shared, a priority flag is provided in order to preferentially control the lamp control of the relatively important effect. This priority flag is stored in the RAM 122, and when it is on, the setting of new control data is prohibited, and the control data currently set is prioritized. When the priority flag is off, the setting of new control data is not prohibited. Therefore, when the priority flag is off, new control data can be set, and when new control data is set, the lamp pattern corresponding to the set control data is emitted. It becomes. An example of the timing at which the priority flag is turned on is the timing at which the most important effect is performed among the control data set in the shared control data area.

By providing this priority flag, it is possible to prohibit the setting of new control data in the one control data area when the control data is set in the one control data area. It has become. This "new control data" includes not only control data different from the control data currently set, but also control data currently set. For example, when the control data for the notice α effect is set, it is prohibited to set the control data for the notice β effect and to reset the control data for the notice α effect.

FIG. 45 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. The lamp control example shown in FIG. 45 shows a control example in which the control data of the notice α and the control data of the notice β are set in the control data area of the same layer. When different control data are set in the control data area of the same layer, different control data are set in order to distinguish the control data.

Based on the above, a time chart showing an example of lamp control in FIG. 45 will be described. In the time chart shown in FIG. 45, when the game state is in a low base state, the notice α effect is generated at time T1, the notice β effect is generated at time T2, and the notice α effect is generated at time T3 during the notice α effect. The time chart when it is finished is shown. In addition, the priority flag is on during the advance notice α production. The notice α effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to T3, and the notice β effect (other than the lamp) is not performed. As an example, the control target lamp is a light emitting member 9CC.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 45, the vertical axis shows the effect control corresponding to the same layer (layer 2 as an example), and the horizontal axis shows the time. Further, in FIG. 45, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data for the advance notice α effect and the advance notice β effect. The light emitting member 9CC emits light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice α effect, and emits light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice β effect. In addition, the advance notice α effect (other than the lamp) and the advance notice β effect (other than the lamp) can be executed at the same time.

In FIG. 45, since the control data is not set in the control data area corresponding to the layer 2, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

In this state, at time T1, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2, and the priority flag is turned on to turn on the advance notice α lamp control. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, the timing for setting the control data of the notice β in the control data area of the layer 2 which is the same layer arrives, but since the priority flag is on, the control data of the notice β is used. Since the data setting is prohibited, the warning β lamp control remains off.

Next, at time T3, the setting of the control data for the advance notice α effect in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the advance notice α effect lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. Although FIG. 45 shows an example in which the notice β effect is not performed even when the notice α effect ends, the notice β effect may be started at the same time as the end of the notice α effect. According to the control shown in FIG. 45, since a plurality of control data can be set in the control data area of one layer, the lamp effect can be diversified even in the limited control data area. You can improve your interest. Further, since the priority flag can be used to produce an effect according to the priority, the player can be appropriately given the visual effect of each lamp effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 46 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. In the lamp control example shown in FIG. 46, when the control data is set, the control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 by the effect control CPU 120 ends when one game ends, and the control data are set. In this case, a control example is shown in which a control data area is provided in which the control of the lamp 9 by the effect control CPU 120 is continued regardless of whether or not one game is completed.

Specifically, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, one game starts with the start of the variable display and ends with the stop display of the variable display. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped and displayed, the control of the lamp 9 ends. A control example is shown in the case where the control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 is continued is provided regardless of whether the variable display is stopped or not. In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as an effect that ends with the stop display of the variable display, there is a notice effect for the fluctuation, and as an effect that continues regardless of whether the variable display is stopped or not, a hold effect or the like is used. Therefore, in FIG. 46, the notice α effect is taken as an example of the effect that ends with the stop display of the variable display, and the hold effect is taken as an example of the effect that continues regardless of whether or not the variable display is stopped.

In the time chart shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), the vertical axis represents the effect control corresponding to the layer, and the horizontal axis represents the time.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the game state is in a low base state and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, along with a notice α effect, and a decorative symbol at time T2. The time chart is shown when the fluctuation of the above is finished, the notice α production is finished at the same time, and the start prize is given at the time T3. The notice α effect (other than the lamp) is performed from time T1 to T2. As an example, the control target lamp is a light emitting member 9CC. The light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color A. It is assumed that the control data of the advance notice α effect is set in the control data area of the layer 2 as an example.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 46 (A) will be described. Since the time chart of FIG. 46 (A) shows the time chart when starting from a state where there is no hold, the control data is not set in the control data area corresponding to the layer 2, so that the lamp As shown in the display mode, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off.

Next, at time T1, when there is a start prize, variable display starts, and a notice α effect for the fluctuation occurs, control data is set in the control data area of layer 2, so that the notice α lamp Control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color A as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, when the notice α effect ends at the same time as the end of the variable display, the setting of the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 is reset, so that the notice α lamp control is turned off. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

Then, at time T3, there is a start prize and the variable display starts, but at that time, since the control data is not already set in the control data area of the layer 2, light is emitted as shown in the lamp display mode. The member 9CC remains off. In the example of FIG. 46 (A), the notice α lamp control is turned on by using the start winning as a trigger, but in general, the trigger for starting the notice effect is not limited to the start winning, so it is turned on according to the notice effect. The timing is determined.

The lamp control example shown in FIG. 46B shows a control example when a continuous effect (holding effect) occurs regardless of whether or not the variable display is stopped, and the controlled target lamp is, as an example, ordinary. The light emitting member 9H is used to emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) the board surface in the vicinity of the winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. When the hold display is displayed in, for example, white, yellow, green, or red, the light emitting member 9H is turned off when it is white, and emits light in the same color (color X) when it is other than white. Lighting, blinking, etc.). It is assumed that the control data of the hold effect is set in the control data area of layer 1 as an example.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 46 (B), there is a start prize at time T1 in a state where the game state is in a low base state and in a variable display state, and there is one hold in white color. At the same time, a hold display effect is generated, the variation of the decorative symbol ends at time T2, and the time chart is shown when there is a start prize at time T3. The hold effect (other than the lamp) is performed from the beginning to the end.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 46 (B) will be described. First, since the color of the hold is white, the control data is not set in the control data area corresponding to the layer 1, so that the light emitting member 9CC is turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

In this state, when there is a start prize at time T1 and the hold display is displayed in color X, the hold lamp control is turned on by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 1. .. As a result, the light emitting member 9CC emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color X as shown in the lamp display mode.

Next, at time T2, even if the advance notice α effect ends at the end of the variable display, the control data for the control data area of the layer 1 is still set, so that the hold lamp control remains on. As a result, the light emitting member 9H continues to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color X as shown in the lamp display mode.

Then, at time T3, the variable display corresponding to the white hold starts, but at that time as well, since the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, the light is emitted as shown in the lamp display mode. The member 9H continues to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color X. The light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the color X will continue until the variable display of the hold corresponding to the color X starts or ends. In this way, even if the variable display ends, light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) may continue without resetting the control data settings. According to the control shown in FIG. 46, the lamp effect can be performed across a plurality of games, so that the interest of the games can be improved.

FIG. 47 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control. The time chart shown in FIG. 47 shows a control example when the extinguishing effect is executed. The round is started at time T1 and the round is performed at time T2 while the game state is the big hit state and the BGM effect is being performed. Is finished, and the time chart is shown when the round is started again at time T3. In addition, a big winning opening winning effect occurs between the start and the end of the round. The BGM effect (other than the lamp) is performed from the beginning to the end, and the extinguishing effect is performed from time T1 to T2 and from time T3 to the end. During that time, the large prize opening effect (lamp) is performed every time the large winning opening is won. Other than) is being done. As an example, the control target lamps are light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR installed at the left and right positions of the special variable winning ball device 7. The extinguishing effect is an effect executed by setting the extinguishing control data for controlling the lamp 9 to be extinguished in the control data area.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 47, the vertical axis shows the effect control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, in FIG. 47, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the probability variation winning effect. As data, the control data set in the control data area of layer 3 is used as the control data for the large winning opening winning effect, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 2 is used as the extinguishing control data. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect. In addition, not only the extinguishing control data but also the control data for controlling the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) can be set in the layer 2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control data areas include the first data area (layer 1 control data area), the second data area (layer 2 control data area), and the first data area in ascending order of priority. Three data areas (layer 3 control data areas) are provided, and the lamp 9 emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) as control data set in the second data area (layer 2 control data area). There are control data for controlling the lamp 9 and data for controlling the extinguishing of the lamp 9, and control data (for controlling the BGM effect) is in the first data area (layer 1 control data area). When the light-off control data is set in the second data area (layer 2) when the data) is set, and when the light-off control data is set, the third data area (layer 3 control) is set. It is possible to set control data (data for controlling the winning effect of the grand prize opening) in the data area).

The light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the error effect, emit light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the probabilistic winning effect, and emit light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the big winning opening winning effect. , Blinking, etc.), turns off in the off effect, and emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in color E in the BGM effect.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 47 will be described. First, since the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, the BGM lamp control is turned on. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

In the case of FIG. 47, since it is a big hit state, a prize is generated to the special variable winning ball device 7 at any time when the round starts. Each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are colored C as the big winning opening winning effect, unless the control data is set in the control data area of the layer larger than the layer 3. Lights up (lights, blinks, etc.).

In such a state, when the round starts when the output control CPU 120 receives the notification command that the winning opening is open at time T1, the lights are turned off in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1. The turn-off control is turned on by setting the data for. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are turned off as shown in the lamp display mode.

At time T2, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light in color C each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won, until the round ends by receiving the notification command after the large winning opening is opened by the effect control CPU 120. Since it lights up, blinks, etc.), the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are turned off or emit light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.). In this way, by turning off the lights except when the special variable winning ball device 7 is won, the color C that emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) becomes conspicuous when the prize is won, so that the interest of the game can be improved. At the same time, the player can more easily recognize the winning. It should be noted that the special variable winning ball device 7 may be made to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) other than when the prize is won, and may be turned off when the prize is won. In this case as well, it will be noticeable that the prize was won.

When the round ends at time T2, the extinguishing control is turned off by resetting the setting of the extinguishing control data in the control data area of the layer 2. As a result, the BGM lamp control is turned on because the control data is not set in the control data area of the layer having a higher priority than the layer 1. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color E as shown in the lamp display mode.

When the round starts again at the time T3, the extinguishing control is turned on by setting the extinguishing control data in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1. As a result, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL are turned off as shown in the lamp display mode. Until the end of this round, the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won, so that the light emitting members 9ATR and 9ATL emit light in color C. (Lighting, blinking, etc.). Hereinafter, the extinguishing effect will be repeated until the jackpot state ends. As described above, in the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 performs a variable winning operation that changes the large winning opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player, as in the short-term open big hit state. When the opening time is extremely short as compared with the case of, the above-mentioned extinguishing control may not be performed. This is because the player may feel uncomfortable if the same control as in the case of a big hit is performed.

According to the control shown in FIG. 47, since the lamp effect having a low priority can be temporarily turned off, the light emission pattern having a high priority can be made conspicuous, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .. In particular, it is suitable for a lamp effect that is often set at all times, such as a BGM effect, or an effect in which the lamps are close to each other.

An example of processing in the case of performing lamp control using the control data setting area described above will be described.

48 and 49 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in step S532 of the variable display start setting process of FIG. 25. In this flowchart, the control data area shown in FIG. 40A will be used as an example. Further, in the explanation of this flowchart, "the control data of the effect Y is set in the control data area of the layer N, and the lamp control data of the effect control pattern of FIG. 9A is set according to the start timing of the effect Y. Is simply expressed as "setting the control data of the effect Y in the layer N". For example, the description "setting the control data of the advance notice effect to layer 2" is described in FIG. 9 (A) in accordance with the start timing of the advance notice effect by setting the control data of the advance notice effect in the control data area of layer 2. ) To set the lamp control data of the effect control pattern. "

In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error lamp is emitting light (step S901). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error notification process in step S75 described above has been executed.

When the error lamp is emitting light (step S901; Yes), since the error effect has the highest priority, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S915 without setting the control data in the lower layer.

When the error lamp is emitting light (step S901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (step S902). When the gaming state is in the high base state (step S902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern (step S903). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on the layer 2 (step S904), and proceeds to step S906. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S903; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S905), and proceeds to step S906.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice effect (step S906). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random value MR10 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern shows super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR10. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the determination result of the advance notice determination process (step S907). If the advance notice effect is not executed (step S907; No), the process proceeds to step S909. When executing the advance notice effect (step S907; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the advance notice effect on the layer 3 (step S908).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a definite notification determination process for determining whether to execute the definite notification effect (step S909). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random value MR11 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using the random number value MR11. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the definite notification effect from the decision result of the definite notification determination process (step S910). If the final notification effect is not executed (step S910; No), the process proceeds to step S912. When executing the final notification effect (step S910; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the final notification effect on the layer 4 (step S911). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S912). Then, the effect execution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the process of step S902, if the gaming state is the low base state (step S902; No), the process proceeds to step S913 of FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern (step S913). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S913; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S914), and proceeds to step S916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S913; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S915), and proceeds to step S916.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the advance notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice B effect (step S916). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random value MR10 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern shows super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR10. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice B effect from the decision result of the advance notice B determination process (step S917). If the notice B effect is not executed (step S917; No), the process proceeds to step S919. When executing the notice B effect (step S917; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the notice B effect on the layer 2 (step S918).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the advance notice A determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice A effect (step S919). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random value MR12 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern shows super reach α and β, it is determined using the random number value MR12. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice A effect from the decision result of the advance notice A determination process (step S920). If the notice A effect is not executed (step S920; No), the process proceeds to step S922. When executing the notice A effect (step S920; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the notice A effect on the layer 3 (step S921).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a definite notification determination process for determining whether to execute the definite notification effect (step S922). Here, it is determined using a fluctuation pattern and a random value MR11 (not shown). For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using the random number value MR11. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the definite notification effect from the decision result of the definite notification determination process (step S923). If the final notification effect is not executed (step S923; No), the process proceeds to step S912. When executing the final notification effect (step S923; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data for the final notification effect on the layer 4 (step S924).

In addition to the control of the lamp 9 in the variable display start setting process described above, the lamp 9 is also controlled in the variable display start waiting process, the variable display during effect process, the jackpot during effect process, and the like. For example, in the variable display start waiting process, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 immediately displays the lamp 9 in the lamp mode in the customer waiting demo effect. On the other hand, when the BGM effect repeats a certain pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the lamp 9 in the lamp mode in the customer waiting demo effect several seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. In this way, even when the same customer waiting demo designation command is received, the control content differs depending on the situation.

Further, in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 based on the start timing set in the variable display start setting process, and whether or not a time determined for each effect elapses is variable. When the display is finished, the setting of the control data of the effect is reset. Further, in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 may control the lamp 9 according to the operation of the player. As an operation example of the player, for example, there is an operation of pressing the trigger button of the stick controller 31A. In response to such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 in the effect processing during variable display. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets each control data shown in FIG. 40 (A) in the control data area to control the lamp 9, and also controls the lamp 9, and the time determined for each effect. After that, the setting of the control data of the effect is reset. Further, even in the big hit middle effect processing, the lamp 9 may be controlled according to the operation of the player, so that the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp 9 according to the pressing operation.

(1) As described above, the game machine according to the above embodiment (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.) is executed (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, grand prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize). A light emitting device (for example, a lamp 9) capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns (for example, a color pattern, a blinking pattern, etc.) corresponding to an effect, an error effect, etc., and a control means (for example, a control means) capable of controlling the light emitting device. The control means can control the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern when the control data is set in the control data area. The control data area includes one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc. in FIG. 40 (A)) and another control data area (for example, layer 5). , Layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, control data area different from one control data area, etc.), and any one of the control data areas When the control data is set in the area (for example, the control data area of any of the control data areas of the layer 1, the layer 2, the layer 3, the layer 4, and the layer 5), the control data The light emitting device is set with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which is set (for example, a light emitting pattern corresponding to a BGM effect, a notice effect, a definite notification effect, a large winning opening winning effect, a probability variation winning effect, an error effect, etc.). Control data so as to emit light, and control data in both control data areas (for example, two control data areas of the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5). When is set, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the priority (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) is set higher in ascending order of priority is set. It is possible to control the light emitting device so as to emit light, and during the first gaming state (for example, the low base state shown in FIG. 40 (A), the normal time in the case of a slot machine, etc.), one control data area (for example, for example). Notice B effect set in the control data (for example, the control data area of layer 2 in the low base state of FIG. 40 (A)) in the control data area of layer 2 in the low base state of FIG. 40 (A). The light emission pattern when (control data, etc.) is set, and during the second game state different from the first game state (for example, the high base state in FIG. 40 (A), slot machine). In the case of thin, the control data (for example, the control data of the BGM effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the high base state of FIG. 40 (A)) is set in one control data area (chance zone, etc.). ) Is different from the light emission pattern when it is set.

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), which is one aspect of the present invention, is an effect to be executed (for example, a slot machine, etc.). , BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, big prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device that can emit light with multiple types of light emission patterns (for example, color pattern, blinking pattern, etc.) For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) are provided, and the control means is used when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 of FIG. 40 (A)). , Layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, one control data area is Control of any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) including at least a different control data area. When the control data is set in the data area for control, etc.), the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect) , Probability variation winning effect, light emission pattern corresponding to error effect, etc.) to control the light emitting device to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, in ascending order of priority), It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the layer 5 or the like is set high, and one control data area (for example, the control data of layer 2 in FIG. 45) can be controlled. When control data is set in the area, etc.), new control data (control data different from the currently set control data, and currently set in the control data area). It is characterized by providing a prohibition means (for example, the priority flag of FIG. 45) for prohibiting the setting of control data or the like.

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be diversified even in the limited control data area, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), which is one aspect of the present invention, is an effect to be executed (for example, a slot machine, etc.). , BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, big prize opening prize effect, probability variation prize effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device that can emit light with multiple types of light emission patterns (for example, color pattern, blinking pattern, etc.) For example, a lamp 9 or the like) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) are provided, and the control means is used when the control data is set in the control data area. The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 of FIG. 40 (A)). , Layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, one control data area is Control of any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) including at least a different control data area. When the control data is set in the data area for control, etc.), the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect) , Probability variation winning effect, light emission pattern corresponding to error effect, etc.) to control the light emitting device to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, in ascending order of priority), It is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the layer 5 or the like is set high, and in the control data area, the first data area (for example, in ascending order of priority) is used. , Layer 1 control data area, etc.), a second data area (for example, layer 2 control data area, etc.), and a third data area (for example, layer 3 control data area, etc.). As the control data set in the second data area, the control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, the light emitting members 9ATL and 9ATR are made to emit light). There are control data for controlling the light emitting device, etc.) and extinguishing control data for controlling the light emitting device to be turned off, and control data (for example, control data for BGM production) is set in the first data area. If this is the case, the extinguishing control data is set in the second data area, and when the extinguishing control data is set, the control data (for example, control of the large winning opening winning effect) is set in the third data area. It is characterized in that it is possible to set data).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the light emission pattern having a high priority stand out, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The description of the effect shown in FIGS. 41 to 49 is an example, and the effect corresponding to the claims and the means for solving the problem may be applied to other than the gaming states shown in FIGS. 41 to 49. Specifically, for example, the gaming state shown in FIG. 41 is a low base state, but it may be applied to a big hit state.

Further, although the effect of controlling the lamp 9 described above is a sound effect, the effect is not limited to the sound effect, and may be an effect executed by the image display device 5, an effect of operating an accessory, or the like. Further, although the number of layers is 5, the number of layers may be 2 or more. Further, the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the jackpot state, but is not limited to this, and is provided for each of various states such as the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. It may be. In addition to the above-mentioned normal time and chance zone, there are RT, AT, ART, regular bonus, big bonus, etc. as the game state in the slot machine, so even if the setting data area is provided for each various state. Good.

As the control data set in the control data area described above, the control data output to the lamp control board 14 is taken as an example, but the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern or the 1-bit data indicating on / off etc. It may be.

When an address of data indicating a light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the address set in the control data area and lamps the control data stored in the address. It is output to the control board 14, and when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

When 1-bit data indicating on / off is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the control data area when "1" indicating on is set in the control data area. The control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect to be performed is output to the lamp control board 14, and when “0” indicating off is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when "0" is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 14, so that the lamp 9 does not emit light in the light emission pattern. It becomes.

Further, as the light emitting pattern of the lamp, the embodiment based on the difference in color has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a blinking pattern or the like having different light emitting intervals may be used. Further, specific examples of the colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but they may emit light in a plurality of colors.

Further, although the emission color is expressed using the alphabet, the colors expressed by the same alphabet in different drawings may be the same color or different colors. For example, the color A in FIG. 41 and the color A in FIG. 42 may be the same color or may be different colors.

Further, the above-mentioned definite notification effect is an effect performed not only on pachinko gaming machines but also on slot machines. Specifically, for example, in a variable display device of a slot machine in which a reel unit composed of three reels is provided, a reel lamp that irradiates light from the back surface of the reels blinks in a V shape. The final notification effect in the slot machine is generally an effect performed by the final notification announcement before the AT or the big bonus is confirmed.

(4) In the gaming machines of (1), (2), and (3) above, the control means is a control data area in which the highest priority is set (for example, control data of layer 5 of FIG. 40 (A)). When control data is set in the area, etc.), it is characterized in that it is controlled so as to emit light in a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the game state.

According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

(5) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), and (4) above, the first control data (for example, the first control data (for example,) that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area. The control data of the notice A effect of FIG. 40 (A) and the second control data that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area, and one game In the state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 40 (A)), the first control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect set in the layer 3 of FIG. 40 (A)) is the second control. A game state (for example, a game state different from one game state) that is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the data for use (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in layer 2 of FIG. 40 (A)). , The high base state of FIG. 40 (B), etc.), the first control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect set in the layer 2 of FIG. 40 (B)) is the second control data (for example, It is characterized in that it is set in the control data area having a lower priority than the notice B effect control data set in the layer 3 of FIG. 40 (B).

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) above, the advance notice α effect set in the control data area of layer 2 of FIG. 46 (A) for control data (for example, One game ends when (control data, etc.) is set (for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine, it starts with the start of the variable display, ends with the stop display of the variable display, and in the case of a slot machine, the game A control data area (for example, FIG. 46 (A)) in which the control of the light emitting device by the control means ends when a person operates the start lever to start the operation and stops the rotation of all the reels. When the control data (for example, the control data area of the layer 2) and the control data (for example, the control data of the hold effect set in the control data area of the layer 1 of FIG. 46B) are set, one A control data area (for example, a control data area of layer 1 in FIG. 46B) is provided so that the control of the light emitting device by the control means is continued regardless of whether or not the game is completed. It is characterized by.

According to such a configuration, the lamp effect can be performed across a plurality of games, so that the interest of the games can be improved.

An example in which the lamp control in the case of performing the lamp effect over a plurality of games described with reference to FIG. 46 is applied to the slot machine will be described. First, one game in the slot machine is started by the player operating the start lever and ends when the rotation of all the reels is stopped. Therefore, when the lamp control described with reference to FIG. 46 is applied to the slot machine, the control data area in which the control of the lamp 9 ends when the rotation of all reels stops, and whether or not the rotation of all reels has stopped. Regardless of this, a control data area where the control of the lamp 9 is continued is provided. In the case of a slot machine, there is an effect that suggests the establishment of a child actor as an effect that ends when the rotation of all reels stops, and as an effect that continues regardless of whether the variable display is stopped or not, the precursor, ART , AT, RT production, etc.

(7) In the game machines of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) above, a special image (for example, active display AH, etc.) including a digestion display (for example, active display AH, etc.) corresponding to variable display is included. It is possible to display an image in which the active display AH and the active display area AHA are combined, and the display mode of the special image has a higher expectation during the variable display (for example, the “star” shown in FIG. 31B. , "Extra-thick" shown in FIG. 32B, etc.), and a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect) that suggests a change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation is shown at a plurality of timings (for example, FIG. 29A). It is characterized in that the degree of expectation that the display mode of the special image changes differs depending on which of the timing 1 and the timing 3) shown in FIG. 32A is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player by paying attention to the execution timing of the specific effect.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various production operations including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the production image in the display area of the image display device 5 and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, even if the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. If there is a hold display displayed in a special mode in any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, either one of the hold displays displayed in the start prize memory display area 5H or the active display A hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed for the object.

For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect that changes the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, it is displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, such as the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode is a color with a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display that was displayed (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display that was displayed in blue). You just have to change the color in.

For example, the degree of expectation that the success effect will be executed differs depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode set as in (C) may be used, or a success effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode set so that the determination ratio of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after the process is different may be used.

For example, 45% as in the ratio of "executed" and "not executed" of the active display change effect of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X" in the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. (The sum of the 1st system change effect 15%, the 2nd system change effect 10%, the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect 20%) vs. 55%, with "execution" and "no execution" A ratio may be set for each, and the ratio of “with execution” and “without execution” as in the fluctuation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. 26 is 0% to 100% in the present embodiment. The ratio according to the above may be set so that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various production operations including the display operation of the production image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like deviate from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to change and modify it arbitrarily as long as it does not.

For example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in the game is given and the given game is given. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area by using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

That is, it is provided with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each of the game media based on the passage of the starting area provided in the game area and deriving and displaying the display result. It is a game machine that controls a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the game score is not 0, the game score is used in the game machine. The game is played by driving the game ball enclosed in the game into the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hit of the game ball, and the game score is obtained according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that adds. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game record. A game recording medium processing means for reading out the recording information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot may be provided.

Further, in the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, when the variation is started, 1 Although an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching (when not reaching). Is sent a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (before the so-called second stop), and the second command is used after reaching (when not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of re-lottery effect. May send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Storage display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st start port switch 22B ... 2nd start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (5)

It ’s a game machine,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light with multiple types of light emitting patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed, and
Control means that can control the light emitting means and
A setting means for setting control data in each of a specific number of control data areas is provided.
The control means
The light emitting means when the control data is set in the control data area can be controlled so as to emit light at a predetermined light emission pattern,
When control data is set in any one of the control data areas of a specific number of control data areas, the light emission pattern corresponding to the control data set in the one control data area is used . It can be controlled to make the light emitting means emit light,
If the control data into a plurality of control data area of the control data area of the specific number is set, is set in the control data area priority is set high among the plurality of control data area It is possible to control so that the light emitting means emits light with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data .
The light emission pattern when the control data is set in one control data area in the first game state and the control data in one control data area in the second game state different from the first game state. Ri and illumination pattern Do different when it is set,
The setting means is
One specific control in which the control data according to the satisfaction of the first effect condition and the control data according to the satisfaction of the second effect condition are set to a predetermined priority in a specific number of control data areas. Can be set in the data area for
When the second effect condition is satisfied when the control data corresponding to the satisfaction of the first effect condition is not set in the specific control data area, the control data corresponding to the establishment of the second effect condition is satisfied. Set the data,
When the control data corresponding to the establishment of the first effect condition is set in the specific control data area and the second effect condition is satisfied, the first effect is performed by the establishment of the first effect condition. When the priority of the effect is higher than the priority of the second effect performed by the satisfaction of the second effect condition, it is prohibited to set the control data according to the satisfaction of the second effect condition, and the first When the priority of one effect is lower than the priority of the second effect, control data corresponding to the satisfaction of the second effect condition is set.
A game machine characterized by that. Wherein, the highest priority if the control data is set in the control data area to be set, that is controlled so as to emit light at light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the gaming state The gaming machine according to claim 1. The first control data that causes the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area, and the second light emitting means that emits light in the second light emitting pattern when set in the control data area. There are two control data, and in one game state, the first control data is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the second control data, and the game state is different from the one game state. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first control data is set in a control data area having a lower priority than the second control data. When the control data is set, the control data area where the control of the light emitting means by the control means ends when one game ends, and whether the one game ends when the control data is set. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a control data area for continuing control of the light emitting means by the control means is provided regardless of whether or not the control means is provided. A special image including a digestion display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed, and the display mode of the special image can be changed to a higher expectation mode during the variable display, and the display mode can be changed to a higher expectation mode. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the display mode of the special image changes depending on which of the plurality of timings the specific effect suggesting the change of the above is executed. Game machine.